specification - projectcorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/bungarribee... ·...

172
Page 1 of 140 SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station Bungarribee Parklands CLIENT Western Sydney Parklands Trusts Po Box 3064 Parramatta NSW 2124 PRINCIPAL CONSULTANT JMD Design Pty Ltd 190 James Street Redfern NSW 2016 Issue Date Revision Tender Submission 17.12.15 01 ARCHITECT Stanic Harding Pty Ltd Nom. Architect: A Stanic 5294 Po Box 7811 Bondi Beach NSW 2026 Tel: 02 9300 0119 E: [email protected]

Upload: others

Post on 26-Jun-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Page 1 of 140

SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Bungarribee Parklands CLIENT Western Sydney Parklands Trusts Po Box 3064 Parramatta NSW 2124 PRINCIPAL CONSULTANT JMD Design Pty Ltd 190 James Street Redfern NSW 2016

Issue Date Revision

Tender Submission 17.12.15 01

ARCHITECT Stanic Harding Pty Ltd Nom. Architect: A Stanic 5294 Po Box 7811 Bondi Beach NSW 2026 Tel: 02 9300 0119 E: [email protected]

Page 2: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Table of Contents

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 2 of 140

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................................. 2

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 4

PRELIMINARIES ...................................................................................................................................... 15

SITE PREPARATION ................................................................................................................................ 22

EARTHWORK ........................................................................................................................................... 25

SERVICE TRENCHING ............................................................................................................................ 32

ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND FASTENERS ........................................................................................... 35

STORMWATER – SITE ............................................................................................................................. 42

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT + CONCRETE INSITU – SLABS AND WALLS ...................................... 45

STRUCTURAL STEEL .............................................................................................................................. 47

BLOCK CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 54

RENDERING AND PLASTERING ............................................................................................................. 59

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING .......................................................................................................................... 66

STEEL – HOT-DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS .......................................................................................... 69

SOFFIT LINING ........................................................................................................................................ 71

SUSPENDED CEILING ............................................................................................................................ 73

TIMBERWORK ......................................................................................................................................... 75

CERAMIC TILING ..................................................................................................................................... 79

PARTITION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................... 85

TERMITE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 88

METAL FINISHES + ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK ........................................................................... 90

DOORS, GATES + HATCH ...................................................................................................................... 94

BUILDING ACCESS SAFETY SYSTEMS ............................................................................................... 100

THERMAL INSULATION ........................................................................................................................ 103

ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL .................................................................................................... 107

HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL ..................................................................................................... 114

SANITARY FIXTURES ............................................................................................................................ 122

TENSILE SECURITY MESH SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 123

LOUVRE WINDOWS .............................................................................................................................. 124

SIGNAGE ............................................................................................................................................... 129

PAINTING ............................................................................................................................................... 130

APPENDIX A MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE

APPENDIX B FIXTURES AND FITTING SCHEDULE

APPENDIX C METALWORK SCHEDULE

APPENDIX D HARDWARE SCHEDULE

APPENDIX E WALLMULLA HINGES

APPENDIX F KORDON TERMITE BARRIER

APPENDIX G LATICRETE

Page 3: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Table of Contents

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 3 of 140

Page 4: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 4 of 140

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

Design Design development: The works include development of the design beyond that documented, as required. Design by contractor: If the contractor provides design, use only appropriately qualified persons and conform to all statutory requirements. Conflict with the documents: If it is believed that a conflict exists between statutory requirements and the documents, notify the contract administrator immediately and provide a recommendation to resolve the conflict. Noise levels General: Install systems within the limits of the contract design and documented equipment performance. Performance Structural: If required, provide structures, installations and components as follows: - Structural design actions: To the AS 1170 series. Importance level to AS/NZS 1170.0:

1.2 PRECEDENCE

General Worksections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting

requirements of this worksection. - The requirements of the worksections override conflicting requirements of their referenced

documents. - The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements. -

1.3 CROSS REFERENCES

Common requirements Requirement: Conform to the following worksections: - Adhesives, sealants and fasteners. - Metals and prefinishes. - Termite control managment - Timber products, finishes and treatment. - Concrete. Cross referencing styles Within the text: - Worksection titles are indicated by Italicised text. - Subsection titles are indicated by BOLD text. - Clause titles are indicated by BOLD text. - Subclause titles are indicated by Bold text.

Page 5: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 5 of 140

1.4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Contractual relationships General: Responsibilities and duties of the principal, contractor and contract administrator are not altered by requirements in the documents referenced in this specification. Current editions General: Use referenced documents that are the editions, with amendments, current 3 months before the closing date for tenders, except where other editions or amendments are required by statutory authorities.

1.5 INTERPRETATION

Documentation conventions Imperative mood and streamlined language: The words shall or shall be are implied where a colon is used following a keyword or within a sentence or sentence fragment. Subject of sentences and phrases: Specification requirements are to be performed by the contractor, unless stated otherwise. Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this specification the following abbreviations apply: - AS: Australian Standard. - BCA: National Construction Code Series Volume One: Building Code of Australia Class 2

to 9 Buildings and Volume Two: Building Code of Australia Class 1 and Class 10 Buildings. - GRP: Glass Reinforced Plastic. - IP: Ingress protection. - NATA: National Association of Testing Authorities. - NCC: National Construction Code. - NZS: New Zealand Standard. - PCA: National Construction Code Series Volume 3: Plumbing Code of Australia. - PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. - PVC-U: Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride. Also known as UPVC. - SDS: Safety data sheets. - VOC: Volatile Organic Compound. - WHS: Work Health and Safety. Definitions General: For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply: - Access for maintenance: Includes access for maintenance, inspection, measurement,

operation, adjustment, repair, replacement and other maintenance related tasks. - Accessible, readily: Readily accessible, easily accessible, easy access and similar terms

mean capable of being reached quickly and without climbing over or removing obstructions, mounting upon a chair, or using a movable ladder, and in any case not more than 2.0 m above the ground, floor or platform.

- Attendance: Attendance, provide attendance and similar expressions mean give assistance for examination and testing.

- Contract administrator: Contract administrator has the same meaning as architect or superintendent and is the person appointed by the owner or principal under the contract.

- Contractor: Contractor has the same meaning as builder and is the person or organisation bound to carry out and complete the work under the contract.

- Default: Specified value, product or installation method which is to be provided unless otherwise documented.

- Design life: The period of time for which it is assumed, in the design, that an asset will be able to perform its intended purpose with only anticipated maintenance but no major repair or replacement being necessary.

Page 6: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 6 of 140

- Documented: Documented, as documented and similar terms mean contained in the contract documents.

- Economic life: The period of time from the acquisition of an asset to when the asset, while still physically capable of fulfilling its function and with only anticipated maintenance, ceases to be the lowest cost alternative for satisfying that function.

- Geotechnical site investigation: The process of evaluating the geotechnical characteristics of the site in the context of existing or proposed construction.

- Give notice: Give notice, submit, advise, inform and similar expressions mean give notice (submit, advise, inform) in writing to the contract administrator.

- High level interface: Systems transfer information in a digital format using an open system interface.

- Hot-dip galvanized: Zinc-coated to AS/NZS 4680 after fabrication with coating thickness and mass to AS/NZS 4680 Table 1.

- Ingress protection: IP, IP code, IP rating and similar expression have the same meaning as IP Code in AS 60529.

- Joints: . Construction joint: A joint with continuous reinforcement provided to suit construction

sequence. . Contraction joint: An opening control joint with a bond breaking coating separating the

joint surfaces to allow independent and controlled contraction of different parts or components, induced by shrinkage, temperature changes or other causes. It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control.

. Control joint: An unreinforced joint between or within discrete elements of construction which allows for relative movement of the elements.

. Expansion joint: A closing control joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler to allow axial movement due to thermal expansion or contraction with changes in temperature or creep. It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control.

. Isolation joint: A joint between elements of a structure designed to isolate structural movement while permitting horizontal and/or vertical movement between abutting elements.

. Open joint: As shown on architectural drawings.

. Weakened plane joint: A contraction joint created by forming a groove, extending at least one quarter the depth of the section, either by using a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip.

. Sealant joint: A joint filled with a flexible synthetic compound which adheres to surfaces within the joint to prevent the passage of dust, moisture and gases.

. Structural control joint: A control joints (contraction, expansion and isolation) in structural elements when used with applied material and finishes.

. Substrate joint: A joint in the substrate which includes construction joints and joints between different materials.

- Local (government) authority: A body established for the purposes of local government by or under a law applying in a state or territory.

- Low level interface: Systems transfer information via terminals and voltage free contacts. - Manufacturer’s recommendations: Recommendations, instructions, requirements,

specifications (and similar expressions) provided in written or other form by the manufacturer and/or supplier relating to the suitability, use, installation, storage and/or handling of a product.

- Metallic-coated: Steel coated with zinc or aluminium-zinc alloy as follows: . Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397. Metal thicknesses specified are base metal

thicknesses. . Ferrous open sections zinc coated by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791. . Ferrous hollow sections zinc coated by a continuous or specialised process: To

AS/NZS 4792.

Page 7: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 7 of 140

- Network utility operator: The entity undertaking the piped distribution of drinking water or natural gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or external stormwater drainage system.

- Obtain: Obtain, seek and similar expressions mean obtain (seek) in writing from the contract administrator.

- Pipe: Includes pipe and tube. - Practical completion or Defects free completion: The requirements for these stages of

completion are defined in the relevant building contract for the project. - Principal: Principal has the same meaning as owner, client and proprietor and is the party

to whom the contractor is legally bound to construct the works. - Professional engineer: As defined by the BCA. - Proprietary: Proprietary means identifiable by naming manufacturer, supplier, installer,

trade name, brand name, and catalogue or reference number. - Provide: Provide and similar expressions mean supply and install and include development

of the design beyond that documented. - Prototype: A full size mock-up of components, systems or elements to demonstrate or test

construction methods, junctions and finishes, and to define the level of quality. - Record drawings: Record drawings has the same meaning as as-installed drawings, as-

built drawings and work-as-executed drawings. - Registered testing authority: . An organisation registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to

test in the relevant field; or . An organisation outside Australia registered by an authority recognised by NATA through

a mutual recognition agreement; or . An organisation recognised as being a Registered Testing Authority under legislation at

the time the test was undertaken. - Required: Required by the documents, the local council or statutory authorities. - If required: A conditional specification term for work which may be shown in the documents

or is a legislative requirement. - Sample: A physical example that illustrates products, workmanship, materials, or

equipment and establish standards by which the work will be judged. It includes samples, prototypes and sample panels.

- Statutory authority: A public sector entity created by a specific law of the Commonwealth, State or Territory.

- Supply: Supply, furnish and similar expressions mean supply only. - Tests - completion: Tests carried out on completed installations or systems and fully

resolved before the date for practical completion, to demonstrate that the installation or system, including components, controls and equipment, operates correctly, safely and efficiently, and meets performance and other requirements. The contract administrator may direct that completion tests be carried out after the date for practical completion.

- Tests - pre-completion: Tests carried out before completion tests, including: . Production: Tests carried out on a purchased item, before delivery to the site. . Progressive: Tests carried out during installation to demonstrate performance in

according with this specification. . Site: Tests carried out on the site. . Type: Tests carried out on an item identical with a production item, before delivery to the

site. - Tolerance: The permitted difference between the upper limit and the lower limit of

dimension, value or quantity. - Verification: Provision of evidence or proof that a performance requirement has been met

or a default exists.

Page 8: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 8 of 140

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Services diagrammatic layouts General: Layouts of service lines, plant and equipment shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only, except where figured dimensions are provided or calculable. Before commencing work: - Obtain measurements and other necessary information. - Coordinate the design and installation in conjunction with all trades. Levels General: Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines. PERFORMANCE General General: If required, provide structures, installations and components as follows: - Fixed access ways: To AS 1657. - Structural design actions: To AS/NZS 1170.0

1.7 SUBMISSIONS

Authorities Authorities’ approvals: if required, submit documents showing approval by the authorities whose requirements apply to the work Correspondence: Submit copies of correspondence and notes of meetings with authorities. Electronic submissions File Format: DWG,DXF and PDF Transmission medium: Email (drop box) or CD/ DVD Hard copy submission Quantity: one Standard contract drawing size: A3 Errors Errors: If a submission contains errors, make a new or amended submission as appropriate, indicating changes made since the previous submission. Identification General: Identify the project, contractor, subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer, applicable product, model number and options, as appropriate and include pertinent contract document references. Include serviced connection requirements and product certification. Identify proposals for non – compliance with project requirements, and characteristics which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. Notice Minimum notice: 2 days Substitution Performance: Equal or greater to that specified. Alternatives: if alternatives to the documented products, methods or systems are proposed, submit sufficient information to permit evaluation of the proposed alternatives including the following: - Samples - Essential technical information in English - Reasons for the proposed substitutions - Statement of the extent of the revisions to the contract documents - Statement of the extent if the revisions to the construction program, - Statement of cost implications including cost outside the contract. - Statement of consequent alterations to other parts of the works.

Page 9: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 9 of 140

Evidence: If the documented products or systems are unavailable within the time constraints of the construction program submit evidence, from the supplier. Criteria : If the substitution covers unavailability or is for any other reason, submit evidence that the substitution: - is of nett enhanced value to the Proprietor. - Is consistent with the contract documents and is as effectual as the identified proprietary

items.

1.8 INSPECTION

Notice Concealment: If notice of inspection is required in respect of parts of the works that are to be concealed, advise when the inspection can be made before concealment. Tests: Give notice of the time and place of documented tests. Refer to Preliminaries Section

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Manufacturers’ or suppliers’ recommendations General: Provide and select, if no selection is given, transport, deliver, store, handle, protect, finish, adjust and prepare for use the manufactured items in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or supplier. Proprietary items/systems/assemblies: Assemble, install or fix to substrate in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or supplier. Project modifications: Advise of activities that supplement, or are contrary to the recommendations of the manufacturers or supplier. Sealed containers General: If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or packages, bring the materials or products to point of use in the original containers or packages. Prohibited materials General: Do not provide the following: - Materials, exceeding the limits of those listed, in the Safe Work Australia Hazardous

Substances Information System (HSIS). - Materials that use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) or hydro chlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) in the

manufacturing process.

2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Consistency General: For each material or product use the same manufacturer or source and provide consistent type, size, quality and appearance. Corrosion resistance General: Conform to the following atmospheric corrosivity category as defined in AS 4312and the AS/NZS 2312 series. Exterior atmospheric corrosivity category: High Galvanizing Severe conditions: Galvanize mild steel components (including fasteners) to AS 1214 or AS/NZS 4680 as appropriate, if: - Exposed to weather. - Embedded in masonry. - Exposed to or in air spaces behind the external leaf of masonry walls. - In contact with chemically treated timber, other than copper chrome arsenate (CCA).

Page 10: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 10 of 140

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SAMPLES

General Incorporation of samples: Only incorporate samples in the works which have been endorsed for inclusion. Do not incorporate other samples. Retention of samples: Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site, until the date of practical completion. Unincorporated samples: Remove on completion.

3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

General Documentation: Include dimensioned drawings showing details of the fabrication and installation of structural elements and building components. Diagrammatic layouts: Coordinate work shown diagrammatically in the contract documents, and prepare dimensioned set-out drawings. Record drawings: Amend all documented shop drawings to include changes made during the progress of the work and up to the end of the defects liability period. Submission medium: Electronic Drawing size: A3

3.3 OFF-SITE DISPOSAL

Removal of material General: Dispose of building waste material off site to the requirements of the relevant authorities.

3.4 FIXING

Fasteners General: Use proprietary fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient for the rigidity of the assembly. Use specified exposed fixings for soffit lining.

3.5 SERVICES CONNECTIONS

Connections General: Co-ordinate connection to main Parklands stormwater system. Refer to Hydraulic Engineers documentation.

3.6 SERVICES INSTALLATION

General Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing services to, fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements. Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly. Allow for movement in both structure and services. Concealment: Unless otherwise documented, conceal all cables, ducts, trays and pipes except where installed in plant spaces, ceiling spaces and riser cupboards. If possible, do not locate on external walls. Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the manufacturer.

Page 11: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 11 of 140

Dissimilar metals General: Join dissimilar metals with fittings of electrolytically compatible material. Temporary capping Pipe ends: During construction protect open ends of pipe with metal or plastic covers or caps. Piping General: Install piping in straight lines at uniform grades without sags. Arrange to prevent air locks. Provide sufficient unions, flanges and isolating valves to allow removal of piping and fittings for maintenance or replacement of plant. Spacing: Provide at least 25 mm clear between pipes and between pipes and building elements, additional to insulation. Changes of direction: Provide long radius elbows or bends and sets where practicable, and swept branch connections. Provide elbows or short radius bends where pipes are led up or along walls and then through to fixtures. Do not provide mitred fittings. Vibration: Arrange and support piping so that it remains free from vibration whilst permitting necessary movements. Minimise the number of joints. Embedded pipes: Do not embed pipes that operate under pressure in concrete or surfacing material. Differential movement General: If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements between buildings and the ground in which pipes or conduits are buried, provide control joints in the pipes or conduits, as follows: - Arrangement: Arrange pipes and conduits to minimise the number of control joints. - Magnitude: Accommodate the predicted movements.

3.7 BUILDING PENETRATIONS

Sleeves General: If piping or conduit penetrates building elements, provide metal or PVC-U sleeves formed from pipe sections as follows: - Movement: Arrange to permit normal pipe or conduit movement. - Diameter (for non-fire-resisting rated building elements): Sufficient to provide an annular

space around the pipe or pipe insulation of at least 12 mm. - Prime paint ferrous surfaces. - Terminations: . If cover plates are fitted: Flush with the finished building surface. . In fire-resisting and acoustic-rated building elements: 50 mm beyond finished building

surface. . In floors draining to floor wastes: 50 mm above finished floor. . Elsewhere: 5 mm beyond finished building surface. . Termite management: To AS 3660.1.

- Thickness: . Metal: 1 mm or greater. . PVC-U: 3 mm or greater.

Sleeves for cables: For penetrations of cables not enclosed in conduit through ground floor slabs, beams and external walls provide sleeves formed from PVC-U pipe sections.

3.8 SUPPORT AND STRUCTURE

General Requirement: Provide incidental supports and structures to suit the services.

Page 12: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 12 of 140

3.9 ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE

General Requirement: Provide access for maintenance of plant and equipment. Standards: Conform to the relevant requirements of AS 1470, AS 1657, AS/NZS 1892.1, AS 2865 and AS/NZS 3666.1. Work Health and Safety: Conform to the requirements of the applicable Work Health and Safety regulations. Protection from injury: Protect personnel from injury caused by contact with objects including those that are sharp, hot or protrude at low level. Plant room flooring surfaces: R10 Slip resistance classification to AS 4586. Trip hazards: Do not run small services including drains and conduits across floors where they may be a trip hazard. Manufacturer's standard equipment: Modify manufacturer’s standard equipment when necessary to provide the plant access documented. Clearances Minimum clearances for access: Conform to the following: - ≥ 2100 mm clear vertically above horizontal floors, ground and platforms. - Preferably ≥ 750 m clear, but in no case less than 600 mm horizontally between equipment

or between equipment and building features including walls. - If tools are required to operate, adjust or remove equipment, provide sufficient space so

that the tools can be used in their normal manner and without requiring the user to employ undue or awkward force.

- If equipment components are hinged or removable, allow the space recommended by the manufacturer.

- Within plant items: Conform to the preceding requirements, and in no case less than the clearances recommended in BS 8313.

Elevated services other than in occupied areas Other areas: Provide access as follows: - Locate to minimise inconvenience or damage to the building structure or finishes. Facilities for access Maintenance access will be required to the shelter roof and gutters. The fabrication of the fascia plates will therefore require a secure ladder fixing point and a harness point will be required for roof top safety. Refer to BUILDING ACCESS SAFETY SYSTEMS. Piping Requirement: Conform to the following: - Provide access and clearance at stormwater inspection eye to allow stormwater line

maintenance. Refer to Hydraulic Engineers documentation.

3.10 MARKING AND LABELLING

General Requirement: Mark and label services and equipment for identification purposes as follows: - Pipes, conduits and ducts: To AS 1345 throughout its length, including in concealed

spaces. . Services control switches. . Temperature and humidity sensors.

Underground services Survey: Accurately record the routes of underground pipes before backfilling. Include on the record drawings. Records: Provide digital photographic records of underground pipe routes before backfilling. Include in operation and maintenance manual.

Page 13: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 13 of 140

Location marking: Accurately mark the location of underground pipes with route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base, engraved to show the direction of the line and the name of the service. Markers: Place markers at ground level at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m. Marker bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum concrete. Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable and pipe run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate. Indicate distance to the next marker.

3.11 WARRANTIES

General Requirement: If a warranty is documented, name the principal as warrantee. Register with manufacturers as necessary. Retain copies delivered with components and equipment. Warranty period: Start warranty periods at acceptance of installation. Approval of installer: If installation is not by manufacturer, and product warranty is conditional on the manufacturer’s approval of the installer, submit the manufacturers written approval of the installing firm.

3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS

General Requirement: Show the following: - Installed locations of building elements, services

3.13 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

General General: Submit maintenance manual for installation. Format – electronic copies Printing: Except for drawings required in the RECORD DRAWINGS clause provide material that can be legibly printed on A4 size paper. Scope: Provide the same material as documented for hardcopy in electronic format. Quantity and format: Conform to Submissions – electronic copies. Format – hard copy General: A4 size loose leaf, in commercial quality, 4 ring binders with hard covers, each indexed, divided and titled. Include the following features: - Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL, to spine. Identify title of project, volume number, volume subject matter, and date of issue.

- Dividers: Durable divider for each separate element, with typed description of system and major equipment components. Clearly print short titles under laminated plastic tabs.

- Drawings: Fold drawings to A4 size with title visible, insert in plastic sleeves (one per drawing) and accommodate them in the binders.

- Pagination: Number pages. - Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars. - Text: Manufacturers’ printed data, including associated diagrams, or typewritten, single-

sided on bond paper, in clear concise English. Number of copies: 3.

Page 14: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B General Requirements

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 14 of 140

3.14 CLEANING

Final cleaning General: Before the date for practical completion, clean throughout, including all exterior surfaces except those totally and permanently concealed from view. Labels: Remove all labels not required for maintenance.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 SCHEDULES

Warranty schedule Warranty Form Period Gutters, capping, flashings Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

(12 years materials + workmanship)

Concrete floor sealant Written Manufacturer’s recommended time (10 years materials + workmanship)

Paint Written Manufacturer’s recommended time (10 years materials + workmanship)

Windows and Doors Written Manufacturer’s recommended time (10 years materials + workmanship)

Sanitary fittings and fixtures Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Ceramic Tiles Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Light fittings Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

AC split system (Type B Building)

Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Metal deck sheet roofing Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Profiled sheet roofing Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Anodised Aluminium perforated panels

Written Manufacturer’s recommended time for anodised finish ( 7 years anodised finish)

Hot dipped galvanised finish Written Manufacturer’s recommended time

Page 15: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 15 of 140

PRELIMINARIES

1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

General conditions General: To Contract selected by Western Sydney Parklands Trust “Preliminaries” Information supplied by the Principal (The Trust – WSPT) that contradicts information set out below takes precedence. Interpretation Cross reference: The clause INTERPRETATION, in the General requirements worksection, also applies. The work to be performed under this Contract includes but is not limited to the items outlined below and any miscellaneous ancillary construction works required to achieve the intent of works as shown on the contract documents. The Architects documentation deals with:

- one (1) Amenities Pavilion Type A consisting of o Three (3) Male WC cubicles and two urinals o Six (6) Female WC cubicles o One (1) All Access WC cubicle with baby change o One (1) Store room

- one (1) Amenities Pavilion Type B consisting of

o Three (3) Male WC cubicles and two urinals o Six (6) Female WC cubicles o One (1) All Access WC cubicle with baby change o One (1) Store / Plant room o One Rangers Station

The Landscape Architects documentation (JMD Design) provides information on the specific location of both buildings. The completion of the ground works around each building will be undertaken by others to the Landscape Architects specification and documentation. Each Building has column downpipes that will need to be connected to the main Parklands drainage lines. The specific stormwater scope is outlined in the Hydraulic consultants documentation (H4DA). The structural design for both buildings is outlined in the structural engineers documentation (Cantilever Consulting Engineers) The work as covered by this Contract includes the planning of all works, its ongoing management and supervision, ordering, supplying and co-ordination of deliveries of all materials (unless otherwise specified) and the cost of all labour, equipment, machinery, all applications, testing, certificates, shop drawings, profits, overheads and making good as necessary to complete the works as detailed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of the work, the checking of hydraulic services location and checking the plans for any discrepancies or ambiguities prior to undertaking the works. The Contractor shall immediately refer any discrepancies or ambiguities to the Superintendent for resolution. No claims for delay time or remedial costs to the works shall be accepted due to any discrepancies or ambiguities found after the works have commenced.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The site comprises a series of nominated locations within the overall Bungarribee Parklands development in Bungarribee. The work area and construction access is restricted to the immediate nominated sites for shelter erection and to any storage areas nominated by the Superintendent.

Page 16: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 16 of 140

The Contractor shall be responsible for construction, supply, installation and maintenance of all works detailed and / or specified within the Contract documents including any ancillary works required to achieve the true intent and purpose of the work. Briefly the works include but not limited to: • Install temporary fencing around all site works. • Site preparation to allow for erection of each Amenities Building. • Trenching for pad and strip footings. • Trenching for stormwater line from downpipe / columns. • Trenching for drainage and sewer lines to all sanitary fixtures. • Erection of two (2) Amenities Pavilions including associated roof structures and concrete slabs. • Installation of all electrical (Including A/C +alarm system to Type B building) and hydraulic services. • Installation of sanitary fittings and fixtures. • Installation nominated soffit lining. • Installation of proprietary tensile security mesh system between wall and roof over. • Completion , cleaning and the removal of all plant and equipment and any making good required.

1.3 THE SITE

Site restrictions The contractor will have unrestricted access to the area of the site nominated for shelter erection. Other works may still be occurring concurrently in the Parklands by the main civil contractor and the contractor must co-ordinate with others as required. Rectification Accessways, services: Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site. Provide temporary services whilst repairs are carried out. Property: Rectify immediately any interference or damage to property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site, including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees. Existing services General: This relates to services that have been recently installed adjacent to the nominated shelter sites. Attend to existing services as follows: - If the service is to be continued, repair, divert or relocate. Submit proposals. - If the service crosses the line of a required trench, or will lose support when the trench is

excavated, provide permanent support for the existing service. Submit proposals. - If the service is to be abandoned, remove redundant parts and make safe. Proposals: Submit proposals for action to be taken with respect to existing services before starting this work. Minimise the number and duration of interruptions. - Purpose of submission: For review.

1.4 WITNESS AND HOLD POINTS

Give not less than 48 hours notice so that inspections may be made of the following: Witness Points: These are points in time during construction that allow for inspections to be carried out by the Principals representative. A minimum of 2 working days notice is to be given and the Contractor is to provide the necessary access so that inspections can be made. Hold Points: This is when work for a particular item cannot proceed unless approval / signoff is given by the Principal, their representative or in some cases the Contractor’s consultant. This must be

Page 17: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 17 of 140

done prior to commencement, concealment or finishing dependent on the item in question.

WORK ITEM INSPECTION HOLD POINT Temporary site fencing þ

Setting out works þ

Excavation completed to contract levels or founding material

þ

Main switchboard adjustments and distributions pillars complete and tested.

þ

Services laid in trenches ready for backfilling þ

Structural steel shop drawing þ

After all reinforcement has been placed and tied in position, prior to pouring of concrete for both slabs and footings.

þ þ

Anchor bolts in position before casting in þ þ

All control joint locations in concrete screed þ þ

Separate screed sample to assess honing and sealant þ þ

Samples of soffit lining, nominated fixings and general steel finishes plus tiles and dressed timber elements

þ

Anchor bolts in position before casting in þ þ

After erection of structural steel and prior to enclosing (sheeting/walling/ceilings)

þ þ

After all structural steel work is installed þ

Hydraulic services: Installed pipes prior to back filling þ þ

Placement of all service penetrations prior to concrete pour

þ

Architectural metalwork shop drawings þ

Roofing installation ( Metal and Translucent) including all cappings, flashings, gutters

þ þ

Insulation + Sarking

Set out of anodised aluminium soffit lining þ þ

Commencement of soffit lining on completion of first four panels to check detail

þ þ

Completion of block walls þ þ

Commencement of tiling to check trail set out, substrate, control joints, grout colour.

þ þ

Joinery shop drawings þ

Achievement of Practical Completion for all works þ

Completion of defect list works for all works þ

Completion of Defect Liability Period for all works þ

1.5 CONSTRUCTION PLANT Use of existing services The Contractor having inspected the site at the time of tender will have access to existing services as agreed. NO additional cost is to be incurred due to the Contractor failing to have informed himself of the existing site conditions and available services.

Page 18: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 18 of 140

Protective clothing Protective clothing: Make available protective clothing for the use of visitors. - Safety helmets: To AS/NZS 1801, Type 1. - Certification: Required.

Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ).

Project signboards General: Provide project-specific signboards and as follows: - Locate where directed. - Maintain in good condition for duration of the work. - Obtain permission for removal. - Remove on completion. Other signboards: Obtain approval before display of advertisements or provision of other signboards. Project signboard description The contractor is to make monetary allowance for an A1 size signboard with all project information or as required by the Principal. 1.6 BUILDING THE WORKS Surveys Location: Shelter structures are to be located in line with Landscape Architects site /location plans. Set outs as per architects drawings. Survey marks Definition: The term survey mark means a survey peg, bench mark, reference mark, signal, alignment, level mark or any other mark used or intended to be used for the purpose of setting out, checking or measuring the work. Care of survey marks: Preserve and maintain the owner’s survey marks in their true positions. Rectification: If the owner’s survey marks are disturbed or obliterated, immediately give notice and rectify the disturbance or obliteration. Occupational Health, Safety and Rehabilitation Plan Accidents: Promptly notify the architect of the occurrence of the following: - Accidents involving death or personal injury. - Accidents involving loss of time. - Incidents with accident potential such as equipment failure, slides, cave-ins and fire risk. Accident reports: Submit reports of accidents. - Purpose of submission: Information only. The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any OH +S Plan required by the Western Sydney

Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Environmental Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any EMP required by the Western Sydney Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Incidents Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any IM Plan required by the Western Sydney Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Stormwater Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any management Plan required by the Principal. The

Contractor

Page 19: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 19 of 140

is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of tendering. Soil Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any SM Plan required by the Western Sydney

Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Waste Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any WM Plan required by the Western Sydney

Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Noise Control plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any NC Plan required by the Western Sydney

Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Dust Control Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any DC Plan required by the Western Sydney

Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s requirements at the time of

tendering. Contamination Management Plan The Contractor is to strictly adhere to any Contamination Management Plan required by the Western Sydney Parklands Trust. The Contractor is to make himself aware of the Plan’s

requirements at the time of tendering. Public Safety Whilst the location of the shelter sites are within the greater parklands currently under

refurbishment there may be times when the public accesses the site. The Contractor is required to maintain

safe conditions in relation to every aspect of the Works. The obligation includes provision of warnings signs, barricades, fences and the like. Testing Unless otherwise specified, any testing required by the Contract must be an independent

Authority and approved member of the National Associates of Testing Authorities Australia (NATA). Contractor's representative General: The Contractor must appoint a full time competent supervisor with appropriate experience and training. The supervisor must be accessible, and fluent in English and technical terminology. Subcontracting General: Submit a complete list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers and fully inform them of relevant obligations. Program of work Construction program: Show the following: - Sequence of work.

Page 20: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 20 of 140

- Allowance for holidays. - Activity inter-relationships. - External dependencies including provision of access, document approvals and work by

others. - Periods within which various stages or parts of the work are to be executed. Time scale: Working days. Updated program: Identify changes since the previous issue, and show the estimated percentage of completion for each item of work. Program chart: Display in the contractor’s site office an up-to-date bar chart and network diagram based on the construction program. Site meetings General: Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and arrange for the attendance of appropriate subcontractors, the architect, and appropriate consultants. Frequency: Fortnightly formal site meetings. Minutes: Keep minutes of site meetings. Within 5 working days after each meeting, submit to each party written copies of the minutes. - Purpose of submission: Review. Contacts: At the first site meeting, submit names and telephone numbers of responsible persons who may be contacted after hours during the course of the contract. - Purpose of submission: Information only. Date: Of delivery or availability, to permit

preparation of program. 1.6 COMPLETION OF THE WORKS Final cleaning General: Before the date of practical completion, clean the exterior surfaces exposed to view. Clean debris from the site, roofs, gutters, downpipes and drainage systems. Remove waste and surplus materials. Samples: Remove non-incorporated samples, prototypes and sample panels. Reinstatement General: Before the date of practical completion, clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Removal of plant General: Within 10 working days after practical completion, remove temporary works and construction plant no longer required. Remove the balance before the end of the defects liability period. 1.7 PAYMENT OF THE WORKS Refer to contract conditions for nominated payment terms Progress claims Break down: With each progress claim, submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each worksection or trade heading designated in the specification. Purpose of submission: Review. Method of measurement General: In conformance with the principles of the Australian Standard Measurement of Building Works (ASMM). Other civil engineering work: To AS 1181.

Page 21: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Preliminaries

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 21 of 140

1.8 MISCELLANEOUS Governing law Requirements of authorities: The owner, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and obtained the permits, approvals and other authorisations.

Page 22: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Site Preparation

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 22 of 140

SITE PREPARATION

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide site preparation, as documented. Refer to Landscape Architect documentation for specific site and location information. Incidental works Generally: Undertake the following: - Reinstatement: Reinstate undeveloped ground surfaces to the condition existing at the

commencement of the contract. - Minor trimming: As required to complete the works, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Preliminaries - Earthworks - Concrete insitu - Service trenching - Stormwater- site

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Authorities: Any authority or agency covering statutory requirements relating to the project, including

clearances for work in that particular area. - Clearances: A formal certificate, approval or condition issued by an authority to allow work to be

carried out in a particular area. - Network utility operator: The entity undertaking the piped distribution of drinking water or natural gas

for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system.

1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Site preparation prior to pouring of footings

2 EXECUTION

2.1 EXISTING SERVICES

General Requirement: Before commencing earthworks, locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the earthworks operations including clearing, excavating and trenching.

Page 23: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Site Preparation

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 23 of 140

Excavation: Do not machine excavate within 1 m of existing underground services. Existing service lines: If required, divert services detected during excavation to new routes, clear of the building, and reconnect to the network utility operator’s requirements. Co-ordinate with Principal to determined previously laid service line locations.

2.2 SITE CLEARING

Extent Requirement: Clear only the following site areas: - Areas to be occupied by works such as structures, paving, excavation, regrading and landscaping. Contractor’s site areas: If not included within the areas documented above, clear generally only to the extent necessary for the performance of the works. Clearing and grubbing Clearing: Remove everything on or above the site surface, including rubbish, scrap, grass, vegetable matter and organic debris, scrub, trees, timber, stumps, boulders and rubble. Grubbing: Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below subgrade under buildings, embankments or paving, or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved areas. Backfill holes remaining after grubbing with sand material to prevent ponding of water. Compact the material to the relative density of the existing adjacent ground material. Redundant/decommissioned works: Remove works, including slabs, foundations, pavings, drains and access chambers covers found on the surface. Batters Temporary protection: Where change in level between crest and toe is more than 1.5 m, protect from erosion with geofabric, a hessian and tar or heavy duty black polythene sheet waterproof cover. Seal joints and securely fix down at crest and toe. Surplus material Topsoil and excavated material: Continually remove unwanted stripped soil and other material from the site as the work proceeds, including any material dropped on footpaths or roadways.

2.3 STORMWATER AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

General Erosion and sediment control measures: To the Environmental management worksection. Waterways and drains Waterways: Temporarily divert, as necessary, ditches, field drains and other waterways affected by excavation and reinstate on completion. Stormwater drains: Divert drains detected during excavation to new routes, clear of the building, and reconnect to the network utility operator’s requirements.

2.4 TREE PROTECTION

General Warning signs: Display in a prominent position at each entrance to the site, warning that trees and plantings are to be protected during the contract. Remove on completion. Lettering: Road sign type sans serif letters, 100 mm high to AS 4970 Appendix C. Protection measures: Provide before commencement of earthworks. Trees to be retained Extent: All trees NOT marked for removal. Tree protection Tree protection zone (TPZ): To AS 4970 Section 3. Tree protective measures: To AS 4970 Section 4. Monitoring and certification: To AS 4970 Section 5.

Page 24: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Site Preparation

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 24 of 140

Work near trees Harmful materials: Conform to the following: - Keep the area within the dripline free of sheds and paths, construction material and debris. - Do not place bulk materials and harmful materials under or near trees. - Do not place spoil from excavations against tree trunks. - Prevent wind-blown materials such as cement from harming trees and plants. Damage: Prevent damage to tree bark. Do not attach stays, guys and the like to trees. Work under trees: Do not remove topsoil from, or add topsoil to, the area within the dripline of the trees. Excavation: If excavation is required near trees to be retained, give notice. Minimise period of excavation under tree canopies. Hand methods: Use hand methods to locate, expose and cleanly remove the roots on the line of excavation. If it is necessary to excavate within the drip line, use hand methods so that root systems are intact and undamaged. Roots: Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50 mm diameter. Where it is necessary to cut tree roots, use cutting methods that do not excessively disturb the remaining root system. Immediately after cutting, water the tree and apply a liquid rooting hormone to stimulate the growth of new roots. Backfilling: Backfill excavations around tree roots. Place the backfill in layers of 300 mm maximum depth and compacted to a dry density similar to that of the original or surrounding soil. Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height greater than 200 mm above the original ground surface. Immediately after backfilling, thoroughly water the root zone surrounding the tree. Backfill material: - Mix proportions (topsoil:well-rotted composts) by volume: 3:1. - Neutral pH value. - Free from weed growth and harmful materials. Compacted ground: Do not compact the ground or use skid-steel vehicles under the tree dripline. If compaction occurs, give notice. Compaction protection: Protect areas adjacent the tree dripline. Submit proposals for an elevated platform to suit the proposed earthworks machinery. Watering: Water trees as necessary, including where roots are exposed at ambient temperature more than 35°C. Mulching: Spread 100 mm thick organic mulch to the whole of the area covered by the drip line of all protected trees.

2.5 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE FENCING

Refer to Landscape Architect’s documentation if shelter locations are in close proximity to existing trees.

2.6 COMPLETION

Temporary works Remove at completion. Clean up Progressive cleaning: Keep the work included in the contract clean and tidy as it proceeds and regularly remove from the site waste and surplus material arising from execution of the work, including any work performed during the defects liability period or the plant establishment period. Removal of plant: Within 10 working days of the date of practical completion, remove temporary works, construction plant, buildings, workshops and equipment which does not form part of the works, except what is required for work during the defects liability period or the plant establishment period. Remove these on completion. Waste disposal: To the Environmental management worksection.

Page 25: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 25 of 140

EARTHWORK

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide earthworks to the dimensions and tolerances, as documented. Design Geotechnical and environmental reports provided. Design of depths: To Structural Engineers documentation. General: The footing or pier depths shown on the drawings are provisional. Performance In line with all documentation and relevant Plans of Management.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements + Preliminaries and Site Preparation - Environmental management plans as supplied by WSPT

1.3 STANDARDS

General Earthworks: Conform to the recommendations of those parts of AS 3798 which are referenced in this worksection.

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - GITA: Geotechnical inspection and testing authority. - GTA: Geotechnical testing authority. Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1348, AS 3798 and the following apply: - Description and classification of soils: To AS 1726. - Site classification: To BCA 3.2.4. - Bad ground: Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including fill liable to subsidence,

ground containing cavities, faults or fissures, ground contaminated by harmful substances and ground which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.

- Base: Layer(s) of material forming the uppermost structural element of a pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed.

- Discrepancy: A difference between contract information about the site and conditions encountered on the site, including but not limited to discrepancies concerning the following: . The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed. . Existing site levels. . Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface.

- Rock: Monolithic material with volume greater than 0.5 m3 which cannot be removed until broken up by rippers or percussion tools.

Page 26: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 26 of 140

- Site topsoil: Soil excavated from the site which contains organic matter, supports plant life, conforms generally to the fine to medium texture classification to AS 4419 (loam, silt, clay loam) and is free from: . Stones more than 25 mm diameter. . Clay lumps more than 75 mm diameter. . Weeds and tree roots. . Sticks and rubbish. . Material toxic to plants.

- Subbase: The material laid on the subgrade below the base either for the purpose of making up additional pavement thickness required, to prevent intrusion of the subgrade into the base, or to provide a working platform.

- Subgrade: The trimmed or prepared portion of the formation on which the pavement or slab is constructed. Generally taken to relate to the upper line of the formation.

- Zone of influence: A foundation zone bounded by planes extending downward and outward from the bottom edge of a footing, slab or pavement and defining the extent of foundation material having influence on the stability or support of the footings, slab or pavement.

1.5 TOLERANCES

General Finish: Finish the surface to the required level, grade and shape within the following tolerances: - Under building slabs and load bearing elements: + 0, - 25 mm. - Pavement subgrades: + 0, - 40 mm. - Batters: No steeper than the slope shown on the drawings. Make sure flatter slopes do not impact

on boundaries or required clearances to buildings, pavements or landscaping. - Other ground surfaces: ± 50 mm, provided the area remains free draining and matches adjacent

construction where required. Provide smoothness as normally produced by a scraper blade.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Design Calculations: Submit calculations by a professional engineer to show that proposed excavations and temporary supports, including where applicable supports for adjacent structures, will be stable and safe. Execution details General: Submit the methods and equipment proposed for the ground works. Materials Imported fill: Submit certification or test results by a GTA registered laboratory which establish the compliance of imported fill with the contract including the source. Tests Compaction: Submit certification and/or test results in conformance with the specified level of responsibility to AS 3798.

1.7 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Items to be measured as listed in RECORDS OF MEASUREMENT. - Areas to be cleared and/or stripped of topsoil. - Areas stripped of topsoil. - Excavation completed to contract levels or founding material.

Page 27: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 27 of 140

- Proof roll subgrade before placing fill. - Filling completed to contract levels. - Stockpiled topsoil before spreading.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

General Suitable material: To AS 3798 clause 4.4 including inorganic, non-perishable material suitably graded and capable of compaction to the documented density. Unsuitable materials: Do not use unsuitable material for fill in conformance with AS 3798 clause 4.3. Sulphur content: Do not provide filling with sulphur content exceeding 0.5 % within 500 mm of cement bound elements (for example concrete structures or masonry) unless such elements are protected by impermeable membranes or equivalent means. Re-use of excavated material: Only re-use suitable material in conformance with AS 3798 clause 4.4. Stockpiles: Segregate the earth and rock material and stockpile, for re-use in backfilling operations. Locations: Do not stockpile excavated material against tree trunks, buildings, fences or obstruct the free flow of water along gutters where stockpiling is permitted along the line of the trench excavation. Disposal: If stockpiling is not permitted under the contract, dispose of excavated material off-site to AS 3798 clause 6.1.8.

2.2 BORROW OR IMPORTED FILL

General Borrow or imported material: Only when no suitable excavated material is available. - Suitable material: To AS 3798 clause 4.4. Borrow pits: - Location: More than 3 m from any fence line, boundary, edge of excavation or embankment. - Strip and stockpile topsoil. - Provide erosion protection during winning operations of material and make sure drainage is

maintained. - On completion of winning operations grade abrupt changes of slope, respread topsoil and apply and

maintain hydroseeded grassing.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

Erosion and sedimentation control Drainage, erosion and sedimentation control: To the Environmental management worksection.

3.2 GEOTECHNICAL

As found site conditions General: If the following are encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out any further work in the affected area: - Bad ground. - Discrepancies. - Rock.

Page 28: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 28 of 140

- Springs, seepages. - Topsoil > 100 mm deep. Inspection and testing Inspection and testing: Conform to the following: - Level 1 GITA required to AS 3798 clause 8.2. - Level 2 GTA required to AS 3798 clause 8.3.

3.3 RECORDS OF MEASUREMENT

Excavation and backfilling Agreed quantities: If a schedule of rates applies, provisional quantities are specified, or there are variations to the contract levels or dimensions of excavations, do not commence backfilling or place permanent works in the excavation until the following have been agreed and recorded: - Depths of excavations related to the datum. - Final plan dimensions of excavations. - Quantities of excavations in rock. Method of measurement: By registered surveyor unless otherwise agreed. Rock Level and class: If rock is measured for payment purposes, whether as extra over excavation of material other than rock or for adjustment of provisional measurements, do not remove the rock until the commencing levels and the classes of rock have been determined.

3.4 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL

General Extent: Areas of cut or fill and areas occupied by structures, pavements and embankments. Maximum depth: 200 mm. Topsoil stockpiles General: Stockpile site topsoil intended for re-use and imported topsoil where necessary. Stockpile heights: Establish stockpiles to maximum height of 1.5 m. Mark: Identify stockpiles of different soil types. Vegetation: Do not burn off or remove plant growth which may occur during storage. Protection: Provide the following: - Drainage and erosion protection. - Do not allow traffic on stockpiles. - If a stockpile is to remain for more than four weeks, sow with temporary grass. - Protect the topsoil stockpiles from contamination by other excavated material, weeds and building

debris. Remove: Remove topsoil that is unsuitable for re-use from the site to AS 3798 clause 6.1.8.

3.5 EXCAVATION

Extent Site surface: Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for structures, pavements, filling and landscaping. Make allowance for compaction, settlement or heaving. Footings: Excavate for footings, pits, wells and shafts, to the required sizes and depths. Confirm that the foundation conditions meet the design bearing capacity. Rock General: Do not use explosives.

Page 29: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 29 of 140

Existing services Location: Before commencing earthworks, locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the earthworks operations including clearing, excavating and trenching. Utility services: Contact DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG to identify location of underground utility services pipes and cables. Excavation: Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services. Disposal of excess excavated material General: Remove excess excavated material from site not required or unsuitable for fill. - Standard: To AS 3798 clause 6.1.8.

3.6 SUBGRADES AFFECTED BY MOISTURE

General Requirement: If the subgrade is unable to support construction equipment, or it is not possible to compact the overlying pavement only because of a high moisture content, perform one or more of the following: - Allow the subgrade to dry until it will support equipment and allow compaction. - Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 150 mm, work as necessary to accelerate drying, and recompact

when the moisture content is satisfactory. - Excavate the wet material and remove to spoil, and backfill excavated areas.

3.7 BEARING SURFACES

General Requirement: Provide even plane bearing surfaces for loadbearing elements including footings. Step to accommodate level changes. Make the steps to the appropriate courses if supporting masonry. Deterioration General: If the bearing surface deteriorates because of water or other cause, excavate further to a sound surface before placing the loadbearing element.

3.8 REINSTATEMENT OF EXCAVATION

General Fill adjacent structures and trenches: To AS 3798 clause 6.2.6. Zone of influence: Within the zone of influence of footings, beams, or other structural elements, use concrete of strength equal to the structural element, minimum 15 MPa. Make sure that remedial concrete does not create differential bearing conditions. Below slabs or pavements: Provide selected fill compacted to the specified density. Cut subgrades: Where the over excavation is less than 100 mm, do not backfill. Rectify by increasing the thickness of the layer above. Rock depressions and subsoil drains: Backfill rock depressions and over excavation of subsoil drains using coarse subsoil filter.

3.9 SUPPORTING EXCAVATIONS

Removal of supports General: Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds. Voids General: Guard against the formation of voids outside sheeting or sheet piling if used. Fill and compact voids to a dry density similar to that of the surrounding material.

Page 30: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 30 of 140

3.10 ROCK BOLTING

General Requirement: Provide proprietary high strength steel bars or tubes anchored into holes drilled in the rock and tensioned against plates bearing on the rock face to provide temporary or permanent support for the rock face. Schedule the installation to conform to systematic bolting or calculated relief, as documented. Standard: To AS 4678. Protection General: Protect permanent rock bolts by grouting the drilled hole with cement grout after tensioning the rock bolt. Protect the bearing plate and the exposed portion of rock bolt and anchorage with a protective coating or by embedment in concrete. 300 mm minimum.

3.11 PREPARATION FOR FILLING

Preparation Stripping: Prepare the ground surface before placing fill (including topsoil fill), ground slabs or load bearing elements to AS 3798 clause 6.1.5. Remove materials which will inhibit or prevent satisfactory placement of fill layers, loose material, debris and organic matter. Foundation preparation: To AS 3798 clause 6.1.7. Compaction: Compact the ground exposed after stripping or excavation to the minimum relative compaction in AS 3798 Section 5 and the Minimum relative compaction table. Scarify method: Loosen exposed excavation by scarifying to a minimum or 150 mm, moisture condition and compact to AS 3798 Section 5 and the Minimum relative compaction table. Impact roller and impact compaction: Use an approved method. Slope preparation: If fill is placed on a surface steeper than 4:1 (horizontal:vertical), bench the surface to form a key for the fill. As each layer of fill is placed, cut the existing ground surface progressively to form a series of horizontal steps more than 1 m in width and more than 100 mm deep. Recompact the excavated material as part of the filling. Shape to provide free drainage. Under slabs, paving and embankments Compact the ground: To achieve the densities documented in the Minimum relative compaction table. If necessary, loosen the ground to a depth of more than 200 mm and adjust the moisture content before compaction to a density consistent with subsequent filling. Rock ledges General: Remove overhanging rock ledges.

3.12 PLACING FILL

General Layers: Place fill in near-horizontal layers of uniform thickness, deposited systematically across the fill area. Extent: Place and compact fill to the designated dimensions, levels, grades, and cross sections so that the surface is always self-draining. Edges: At junctions of fill and existing surfaces, do not feather the edges. Mix: Place fill in a uniform mixture. Previous fill: Before placing subsequent fill layers, make sure that previously accepted layers still conform to requirements, including moisture content. Protection: Protect the works from damage due to compaction operations. Where necessary, limit the size of compaction equipment or compact by hand. Commence compacting each layer at the structure and proceed away from it. Protective covering: Do not disturb or damage the protective covering of membranes during backfilling.

Page 31: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Earthwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 31 of 140

Placing at structures General: Place and compact fill in layers simultaneously on both sides of structures, culverts and pipelines to avoid differential loading. Carefully place first layers of fill over the top of structures. Concrete: Do not place fill against concrete retaining walls until the concrete has been in place for 28 days unless the structure is supported by struts.

3.13 FILL MOISTURE CONTROL

General Moisture content: Adjust the moisture content of fill during compaction within the range of 85 to 115% of the optimum moisture content determined by AS 1289.5.1.1 or AS 1289.5.2.1, as appropriate, to achieve the required density.

3.14 COMPLETION

Grading External areas: Grade to give falls away from buildings, minimum 1:100. Subfloor areas: Grade the ground surface under suspended floors to drain ground or surface water away from buildings without ponding. Temporary works Tree enclosures: Remove temporary tree enclosures at completion. Tree marking: Remove temporary marks and tags at completion. Temporary supports: Remove temporary supports to adjacent structures at completion. Site restoration Requirement: Where variation of existing ground surfaces is not required as part of the works, restore surfaces to the condition existing at the commencement of the contract.

Page 32: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Service Training

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 32 of 140

SERVICE TRENCHING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide trenching for limited run of underground hydraulic services, as documented. Design Hydraulic shoring and trench lining equipment: To AS 5047.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Earthwork.

1.3 STANDARDS

General Earthworks: To AS 3798.

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - CBR value: California Bearing Ratio value. -

1.5 TOLERANCES

General Earthworks: To TOLERANCES in the Earthwork worksection.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Safety and stability General; If shuttering and /or bracing of the sides of a trench is required for safety and stability, provide proposals. Off-site disposal Disposal location: Submit the locations and evidence of compliance with the relevant authorities for the disposal of material required to be removed from the site.

1.7 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages: - Service trenches excavated before laying the service. - Services laid in trenches and ready for backfilling.

Page 33: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Service Training

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 33 of 140

2 EXECUTION

2.1 EXISTING SERVICES

Location Requirement: Before commencing service trenching, locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the service trenching operations. Excavation General: Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services.

2.2 EXISTING SURFACES

Grass Removal method: Neatly cut grass turf between trench set-out lines into 300 mm squares. Grass suitable for re-use: Take up and store the turf and water during the storage period, otherwise remove and dispose of it off-site. Small plants, shrubs and trees Small plants required for re-planting: Take up and store. Wrap the rootball in a hessian or plastic bag with drain holes and water during the storage period. Unsuitable vegetation: Remove and dispose of off-site.

2.3 EXCAVATING

Excavation General: Excavate for underground services in conformance with the following: - To required lines and levels, with uniform grades. - Straight between access chambers, inspection points and junctions. - With stable sides. - Width tolerance: ± 50 mm, unless constrained by adjacent structures. Trench widths General: Keep trench widths to the minimum, consistent with the laying and bedding of the relevant service and construction of access chambers and pits. Trench depths General: As required by the relevant service and its bedding method. Adjacent to footings: If excavation is necessary below the zone of influence of the underside of adjacent footings, give notice, and provide support for the footings as instructed. Obstructions General: Clear trenches of sharp projections. Cut back roots encountered in trenches to at least 600 mm clear of services. Remove other obstructions including stumps and boulders which may interfere with services or bedding. Tree protection: To AS 4970. Dewatering General: Keep trenches free of water. Place bedding material, services and backfilling on firm ground, free of surface water. Pumping: Provide pump-out from adjacent sumps or install well points. Adjacent subsidence: Provide recharge points to isolate the dewatering zone. Stockpiles Excavated material for backfill: If required, segregate the earth and rock material and stockpile, for re-use in backfilling operations. Locations: Do not stockpile excavated material against tree trunks, buildings, fences or obstruct the free flow of water along gutters where stockpiling is permitted along the line of the trench excavation. Disposal: If stockpiling is not permitted, dispose of excavated material off-site.

Page 34: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Service Training

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 34 of 140

Unsuitable material Disposal: Remove unsuitable material from the bottom of the trench or at foundation level and dispose of off-site. Replace with backfill material to FILL MATERIALS to the Earthwork worksection.

2.4 TRENCH BACKFILL

General General fill with no stones greater then 25mm occurring within 150mm of the service, or other materiuals as required for particular services or locations. Well graded, inorganic, non-perishable material, maximum size 75mm, plasticity index ≤ 55%.

2.5 SURFACE RESTORATION

General Reinstate existing surfaces removed or disturbed by trench excavation to match existing.

Page 35: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 35 of 140

ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND FASTENERS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide adhesives, sealants and fasteners, as documented. Performance Requirements: - Fitness for purpose: Capable of transmitting imposed loads, sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the

assembly, or integrity of the joint. - Finished surface: That will not cause discolouration. - Compatibility: Compatible with the products to which they are applied. - Sealant replacement: Capable of safe removal without compromising the application of the

replacement sealant for future refurbishment. - Movement: If an adhered or sealed joint is subject to movement, select a system certified to

accommodate the projected movement under the conditions of service. - Fasteners: Accredited for the particular use, capable of transmitting imposed loads and maintaining

the rigidity of the assembly.

1.2 PRECEDENCE

General Worksections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this

worksection. - The requirements of this worksection override conflicting requirements of its referenced documents. - The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements.

1.3 SUBMISSIONS

Samples Seal around top of columns: Install one typical condition. Technical data Sealants: Submit technical data sheets. Warranties Manufacturer’s warranty: Submit the manufacturer’s published product warranties.

1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of prepared joints and penetrations for each joint / sealant application.

Page 36: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 36 of 140

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ADHESIVES

Standards Mastic adhesive: To AS 2329. Polymer emulsion adhesive for timber: To AS 2754.2, not inferior to Type 3. High strength adhesive tape General description: A foam of cross linked polyethylene or closed cell acrylic coated both sides with a high performance acrylic adhesive system, encased in release liners of paper or polyester. Product classification: Select tape to suit substrate as follows: - Firm high strength foam tapes: For high energy surfaces including most bare metals such as

stainless steel and aluminium. - Conformable high strength foam: For the following: . Medium energy surfaces including many plastics and paints, and bare metals. . Lower energy surfaces including many plastics, most paints and powder coatings, and bare

metals. Thickness: Select the tape to make sure a mismatch between surfaces does not exceed half the tape thickness under the applied lamination pressure.

2.2 SEALANTS

Standards General: To ISO 11600. Lightweight building element joints Joints subject to rapid changes of movement: Provide sealants that accommodate the movement of the contact materials. Floor control joints General: Provide trafficable sealants. Bond breaking backing: - Bond breaking materials: Non-adhesive to sealant, or faced with a non-adhering material. - Foamed materials: Closed-cell or impregnated, not water-absorbing.

2.3 FASTENERS

General. Refer to Structural Engineers Documentation Generally Plain washers: To AS 1237.1. - Provide washers to the heads and nuts of bolts, and the nuts of coach bolts. Plugs: Proprietary purpose-made plastic. Powder-actuated fasteners: To AS/NZS 1873.4. Stainless steel fasteners: To ASTM A240/A240M. Steel nails: To AS 2334. - Length: At least 2.5 times the thickness of the member being secured, and at least 4 times the

thickness if the member is plywood or building board less than 10 mm thick. Unified hexagon bolts, screws and nuts: To AS/NZS 2465. Fasteners in CCA treated timber: Epoxy coated or stainless steel. Bolts Coach bolts: To AS/NZS 1390. Hexagon bolts Grades A and B: To AS 1110.1. Hexagon bolts Grade C: To AS 1111.1.

Page 37: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 37 of 140

Corrosion resistance Atmospheric corrosivity category: To the General requirements worksection. Steel products: Conform to the Corrosion-resistance table or provide proprietary products with metallic and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion-resistance. Corrosion-resistance table Atmospheric corrosivity category to AS 4312

Threaded fasteners and anchors Powder actuated fasteners Material Minimum local

metallic coating thickness (µm)

Material

C1 and C2 Electroplated zinc or Hot-dip galvanized

30 Stainless steel 316

C3 Hot-dip galvanized 50 Stainless steel 316 C4 and T Stainless steel 316 - Stainless steel 316 Soffit Fixing Bi-metal 316 grade 10 gauge Finishes Electroplating: - Metric thread: To AS 1897. - Imperial thread: To AS 4397. Galvanizing: - Threaded fasteners: To AS 1214. - Other fasteners: To AS/NZS 4680. Mild steel fasteners: Galvanize if: - Embedded in masonry. - In external timbers. - In contact with chemically treated timber other than CCA treated timber. Epoxy coated: - CCA Treated timber. Nuts Hexagon chamfered thin nuts Grades A and B: To AS 1112.4. Hexagon nuts Grade C: To AS 1112.3. Hexagon nuts Style 1 Grades A and B: To AS 1112.1. Hexagon nuts Style 2 Grades A and B: To AS 1112.2. Screws Coach screws: To AS/NZS 1393. Hexagon screws Grades A and B: To AS 1110.2. Hexagon screws Grade C: To AS 1111.2. Hexagon socket screws: To AS 1420 and AS/NZS 1421. Machine screws: To AS/NZS 1427. Self-drilling screws: To AS 3566.1. Self-tapping screws: - Crossed recessed countersunk (flat – common head style): To AS/NZS 4407. - Crossed recessed pan: To AS/NZS 4406. - Crossed recessed raised countersunk (oval): To AS/NZS 4408. - Hexagon: To AS/NZS 4402. - Hexagon flange: To AS/NZS 4410. - Hexagon washer: To AS/NZS 4409. - Slotted countersunk (flat – common head style): To AS/NZS 4404. - Slotted pan: To AS/NZS 4403.

Page 38: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 38 of 140

- Slotted raised countersunk (oval – common head style): To AS/NZS 4405. Blind rivets Description: Expanding end type with snap mandrel. Type: Closed end for external application, open end for internal application. End material: - Aluminium base alloy for metallic-coated or prepainted steel. - Stainless steel for stainless steel sheet. - Copper for copper sheet. Size: - For sheet metal to sheet metal: 3 mm. - For sheet metal to supports, brackets and rolled steel angles: 4.8 mm. Performance Loads: Provide fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the assembly.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 ADHESIVES

General Requirement: Install to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Preparation Substrates: Conform to the following: - Remove any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion. - If framed or discontinuous, provide support members in full lengths without splicing. - If solid or continuous, remove excessive projections. - If previously painted, remove cracked or flaking paint and lightly sand the surface. Contact adhesive Precautions: Do not use contact adhesive if: - A substrate is polystyrene foam. - A PVC substrate may allow plasticiser migration. - The adhesive solvent can discolour the finished surface. - Dispersal of the adhesive solvent is impaired. Two-way method: Immediately after application, press firmly to transfer adhesive and then pull both surfaces apart. Allow to tack off and then reposition and press firmly together. Tap areas in contact with a hammer and padded block. One-way method: Immediately after application, bring substrates together and maintain maximum surface contact for 24 hours by clamps, nails or screws as appropriate. If highly stressed, employ permanent mechanical fasteners. High strength adhesive tape Preparation: - Non-porous surfaces: Clean with surface cleaning solvents such as isopropyl alcohol/water, wash

down and allow to dry. - Porous surfaces: Prime the surface with a contact adhesive compatible with the tape adhesive

system. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer for application to the following: Copper, brass, plasticised vinyl and hydrophilic surfaces such as glass and ceramics in a high humidity environment. Applied lamination pressure: Make sure the tape experiences 100 kPa. Application temperature: Generally above 10°C, consult the manufacturer. Completion: Do not apply loads to the assembly for 72 hours at 21°C.

Page 39: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 39 of 140

3.2 JOINT SEALING

General Requirement: Install to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Joint preparation Cleaning: Cut flush joint surface protrusions and rectify if required. Mechanically clean joint surfaces free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of the sealant. Immediately before sealant application, remove loose particles from the joint, using oil-free compressed air. Bond breaking: Install bond breaking backing material. Taping: Protect the surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide masking tape or equivalent means. On completion of sealant application, remove the tape and remove any stains or marks from adjacent surfaces. Primer: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials. Sealant joint proportions General weatherproofing joints (width:depth): - 1:1 for joint widths less than 12 mm. - 2:1 for joint widths greater than 12 mm. Sealant application General: Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces using a pneumatic applicator gun. Make sure the sealant completely fills the joint to the required depth, provides good contact with the full depth of the sides of the joint and traps no air in the joint. Do not apply the sealant outside the recommended working time for the material or the primer. Weather conditions Two pack polyurethanes: Do not apply the sealant if ambient conditions are outside the following: - Temperature: Less than 5°C or greater than 40°C. - Humidity: To the manufacturer’s recommendations. Joint finish General: Force the sealant into the joint and finish with a smooth, slightly concave surface using a tool designed for the purpose. Excess sealant: Remove from adjoining surfaces using cleaning material nominated by the sealant manufacturer. Protection General: Protect the joint from inclement weather during the setting or curing period of the material. Rectification General: Cut out and remove damaged portion of joint sealant and reinstall so repaired area is indistinguishable from undamaged portion.

3.3 FASTENERS

General Requirement: Install to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Fastening to wood and steel Timber substrates: To AS 1720.1 Section 4. Self-drilling screws: To AS 3566.1 for timber and steel substrates. Masonry anchors Installation: To the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Page 40: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 40 of 140

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 ADHESIVES

Preparation Substrates: Ensure substrates are: - Clean and free of nay finish which may impair adhesion. - If framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing. - If solid or continuous, excessive projections are removed. Contact adhesive Precautions: Do not use if: - A substrate is polystyrene foam. - A PVC substrate may allow plasticiser migration. - The adhesive solvent can discolour the finished surface, - Dispersal of the adhesive solvent is impaired. Two way method: Immediately after application press firmly to transfer adhesive and then pull both surfaces apartment. Allow to tack off and then reposition and press firmly together. Tap areas in contact with a hammer and padded block. One way method: Immediately after application bring substrate together and maintain maximum surface contact for 24 hours by clamps, nails or screws as appropriate. If highly stressed employ permanent mechanical fasteners. High Strength adhesive tape Preparation: Non- porous surfaces: Clean with surface cleaning solvents such as isopropyl alcohol/water, was down and allow to dry. Porous surfaces: Prime the surface with a contact adhesive with the tape adhesive system. Applied lamination pressure: Ensure the tape experiences 100kPa. Application temperature: Generally above 10 degree C, consult manufacturer. Completion: Do not apply loads to the assembly for 72 hours at 21 degrees C.

4.2 SEALANT JOINTING

Preparation for jointing: Cleaning: Cut flush joint surface protrusions ands make good. Mechanically clean joint surfaces free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of the sealant. Immediately before jointing remove loose particles from the joint, using oil- free compressed air. Bond Breaking: Install bond breaking backing material. Taping: Protect the surface on each side of the joint using 50mm wide masking tape or equivalent means. On completion of the pointing remove the tape and remove any stains ort marks from the surface. Primer: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials. Sealant joint proportions General weatherproofing joints (width: depth) - 1:1 for joint widths < 12 mm. - 2:1 for joint widths > 12 mm. Sealant application General: Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces using a pneumatic applicator gun. Ensure the sealant completely fills the joint to the required depth; that it is in good contact with the full depth of the sides and that there is no air trapped in the joint. Do not apply the sealant outside the recommended working g time for the material or primer.

Page 41: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Adhesives, Sealants and Fastners

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 41 of 140

Weather conditions Two pack polyurethanes: Do not apply the sealant if ambient conditions are outside the following: - Temperature: < 5 degree C or > 40 degree C. - Humidity: To the manufacturer’s recommendations. Joint finish General: Force the sealant into the joints and finish with a smooth, slightly concave surface using a tool designed for the purpose. Protection General: Protect the joint from inclement weather during the setting or curing period of the material.

Page 42: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Stormwater - Site

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 42 of 140

STORMWATER – SITE

1 GENERAL

1.1 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Earthwork. - Hydraulic Engineers documentation

1.2 STANDARDS

Stormwater drainage Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3.

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definition applies: - Pipe surround: Includes pipe overlay, pipe side support, side zone and haunch zone.

1.4 INSPECTION

Witness Points Give a minimum of 2 days notice and provide the necessary access so that inspections may be made of the following: - Concealed or underground services prior to being covered. - Pipe joints before covering. - Upon completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Joints Solvent cement and priming fluid: To AS/NZS 3879. Type of pipes and fittings Fibre reinforced cement (FRC): To AS 4139 and the following: - ≤ 450 mm diameter: Rubber ring joints to AS 4139. - > 450 mm diameter: With a purpose machined internal spigot and socketsystem within the pipe wall. Glass-reinforced polyester (GRP): To AS 3571.1. Cast iron access chamber covers and frames: To AS 1830 or AS 1831, as appropriate. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To AS/NZS 1254, AS/NZS 1260 or AS 1273, as appropriate. Polyethylene (PE): To AS/NZS 4129, AS/NZS 4130, ISO 8770 or AS/NZS 2033, as appropriate. Precast concrete: To AS/NZS 4058. Rubber ring joints/elastomeric seals: To AS 1646. Plastic pipe for subsoil drainage: To AS 2439.1. Vitrified clay or ceramic: To AS 1741.

Page 43: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Stormwater - Site

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 43 of 140

Bedding material Bed and haunch zones: Provide granular material graded to AS 1141 series.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING

General Laying: Lay lengths separately with the barrel bearing evenly on the prepared bedding. Sockets: Lay with sockets pointing upstream. Cleaning: Clean pipe interior of dirt, debris, mortar and other foreign matter. Protection: Provide temporary caps over the ends of incomplete sections to prevent the entry of foreign matter.

3.2 TOLERANCES

Pipeline tolerances table Permissible angular deviation

from the documented alignment

Permissible displacement from the documented positions

Horizontal 1:300 15 mm Vertical 1:500 5 mm Note: These tolerances are conditional on falls to outlets being maintained and no part of a pipeline having less than the documented gradient.

3.3 STORMWATER LINES

Location General: Provide stormwater line cast into RC pad footing under each structural column with a branch line a set distance. The branch line is complete with an inspection eye line to allow for unblocking of any leaf litter. The inspection eye is to have an inspection eye access plate to be set flush with finished ground level. This plate is to be fit for purpose. Refer to Hydraulic Engineers documentation The branch line is to be left ready for others to make connection to the Parklands stormwater system. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with socket end placed upstream. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. Identification General: Lay a detectable strip or plastic tape in the trench after pipe laying, testing and initial backfilling. Pipe underlay (bedding) General: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, minimum 75 mm, maximum 150 mm thick after compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on the trench bottom or underlay. Pipe surrounds General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers maximum 200 mm loose thickness, and compact without damaging or displacing the piping. Trench backfill General: Backfill the remainder of the trench to the underside of the subgrade with fill material in conformance with the Earthwork worksection.

Page 44: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Stormwater - Site

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 44 of 140

Encasement General: As documented in the Stormwater pipeline schedule. Location: Encase the pipeline in concrete at least 150 mm above and below the pipe, and 150 mm each side or the width of the trench, whichever is the greater.

Page 45: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Concrete Reinforcement + Concrete Insitu

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 45 of 140

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT + CONCRETE INSITU

1 GENERAL

REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION AND DRAWINGS

2 INSITU CONCRETE

2.1 HONED CONCRETE SLAB (CON)

Generally Concrete slabs on ground are to the structural engineers details. The 100mm thick topping slab will have reinforcing mesh to structural engineers details. The screed is to be machine trowel finish to provide a flat and even surface free of trowel marks that is suitable for the proposed finished treatment. Areas that are inaccessible for machine troweling will be hand trowelled to a complimentary finish. This will be also necessary where structural elements penetrate the screed ready for fit off to elements over. The screed will conceal all structural base plates. The screed once completed is to be protected during construction to avoid any damage. No temporary bolt connections are to be made into the slab that would be exposed in the finished floor as the visual quality of the floor is to be maintained. The screed is to be laid to ensure that there are no depressions in the finished screed that would result in ponding. If ponding does occur then the screen will need to be re honed to rectify. Ensure that the slab falls to the open screen side of the both buildings. Honed finish: The concrete surface is to be lightly honed by an appropriate dustless honing process using a grinding machine to grind the visible surfaces. This is to achieve a smooth consistent surface finish exposing an even distribution of aggregate to a achieve a “salt and pepper” appearance. Protect completed work as noted above. Gradients for falls: Minimum gradient to allow adequate drainage should be: 1 in 100 (1.0%) for exposed areas 1 in 200 (0.5%) for covered areas The mix is to be in line with the structural engineers specification

- Concrete colour: Natural grey cement - Aggregate colour: To match project standard for this type of finish in other concrete surfaces

by the Principle Consultant. If none then standard black basalt. - Aggregate size: 10mm max.

Joints: saw cut control joints into topping slab to control cracking. Refer to documentation for type and location. All joint location are to be confirmed with the Superintendent prior to work being carried out. Sealer: Apply a penetrating water based acrylic sealer to seal the finished surface. The sealer will not alter the natural finished appearance of the hone concrete floor once applied. Submit details of the proposal sealer for approval and carry out a separate test sample for final approval. Testing: Ensure the finished hones and sealed concrete slab complies with ASNZ4586 Slip Resistance Classification for New Pedestrian Surface Materials. Undertake all required testing to demonstrate compliance with the Standards and submit compliance certification to the Superintendent. Hold Point: Sample Test Provide a separate sample test panel of 1m x 1m to demonstrate the honed affect prior to carrying out the honing generally. Apply the proposed sealant to half of the sample for approval and testing.

Page 46: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Concrete Reinforcement + Concrete Insitu

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 46 of 140

2.2 RADISSED CORNERS

There are external and internal corners of both buildings that are to be finished to a required radius. The general wall construction is core filled concrete block walling so insitu concrete corner elements are to be constructed to achieve the required radiussed corners. Generally refer to the structural engineers documentation. The contractor however is to ensure that these corner elements are erected so as to provide a face tiled finish that provides a finished wall thickness equal to the adjacent face finished block work and be of equal finished height. The tile face junction of wall and corners also must align. 2.3 INSITU END WALLS The Type A building has racked insitu rc walls at both ends. These walls have differing radiussed corners that must be finished as noted above. The Type B building has one racked end wall as noted above and a combined block wall and insitu corner elements. Check out the wall at the base to allow for the 150mm x high x 25mm deep MS skirting angle to be set flush with finished wall. Generally refer to the structural engineers documentation. The contractor however is to ensure that these corner elements are erected so as to provide a face tiled finish that provides a finished wall thickness equal to the adjacent face finished block work and be of equal finished height. The tile face junction of wall and corners also must align. Hold Point: Alignment check Complete one insitu RC corner / block wall junction that demonstrates that the faces are flush and the radii are as documented once the cement render and the tiles are applied.

Page 47: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 47 of 140

STRUCTURAL STEEL

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide structural steelwork, as documented and provide for the fixing of adjoining building elements that are to be connected to or supported on the structural steel. Structural steel and metals suited to their required function, finish and method of fabrication, in sections of strength and stiffness adequate for their purposed. Ensure the rigidity of the assembly without causing deflection or distortion of finishes surfaces. Refer to Structural engineers details.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Steel – hot-dip galvanized coatings. - Structural Engineers Specification and Drawings

1.3 STANDARDS

General Materials, construction, fabrication and erection: To AS 4100. Cold-formed steel: To AS/NZS 4600.

1.4 MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTS

Technical manuals Website: www.steel.com.au/library.

1.5 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - AESS: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. - ILAC: International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Origin of Steel Requirement: If it is proposed to use steel not of Australian origin, submit documentation which demonstrates that the steel complies with Australian Standards Calculations Adequacy of structure: If required, submit calculations to justify the adequacy of the structure to sustain any loads and/or procedures, which may be imposed during construction. Execution Anchor bolts: If anchor bolts do not meet specified location tolerances, submit proposals that will allow steel erection to proceed.

Page 48: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 48 of 140

Distortions: Submit proposals for preventing or minimising distortion of galvanized components, welded components or welded and galvanized components; and proposals for restoration to design shape. Hand cutting: If hand cutting of bolt holes is necessary, submit a report and proposed options. Identification marks: If members and/or connections are to be exposed to view, grind flush and make good all markings and branding prior to galvanising. Splicing: If splicing of structural members is intended, submit proposals. Temporary connections: If not documented, submit details. Welding procedures: Submit details of proposed welding procedures, using the WPS form in Appendix C of AS/NZS 1554.1. Maintenance manual On completion: Submit a manual of recommendations from GALVASPAN® for the maintenance of the purlin and girt system including frequency of inspection and recommended methods of access, inspection, cleaning, repair and replacement. Products Concrete or masonry anchors: If masonry anchors, other than those documented, are required or proposed for the support or fixing of structural steel, submit evidence of the anchor capacity to carry the load. Bolts: For each bolt diameter and each different length of each bolt diameter proposed, submit a NATA or an ILAC accredited laboratory test certificate as evidence of conformance to AS/NZS 1252. Records Drawings: Supply as-built structural and shop drawings. Samples AESS: Submit samples of AESS as documented in the AESS schedule. Shop drawings General: Submit shop drawings to a scale that best describes the detail, showing the following: - Each assembly, component and connection. - Fabrication, surface treatment, transport and erection. Specific requirements: Include the following information: - Marking plans. - Identification. - Steel type and grade. - Dimensions of items. - Required camber, where applicable. - Fabrication methods including, where applicable, hot or cold forming and post weld heat treatment. - Location, type and size of welds and/or bolts and bolt holes. - Weld categories and bolting categories. - Orientation of members. - Surface preparation methods and coating system if shop applied. - Best practice details in relation to application of protective coatings. - Breather holes for hollow sections (with seal plates) being hot-dip galvanized. - Procedures necessary for shop and site assembly, and erection. - Location of and preparation for site welds. - Temporary works such as lifting lugs, support points, temporary cleats and bracing which are

required for transport and erection of the structural steelwork, and the procedure for final removal. - Required fixings for adjoining building elements. Substitution: If alternative sections or connections are proposed, submit details. Purlins and girts: If it is proposed to support anything other than cladding on or from purlins and girts, submit details. Splices: If variations to documented splice locations or additional splices are proposed, submit details

Page 49: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 49 of 140

Subcontractors General: Submit names and contact details of proposed fabricator and installer.

1.7 INSPECTION

Notice – off-site Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: Hold Points. - Submission of the proposed welding procedure to prevent distortion and non-ductile welds in

tension zones. - Commencement of shop fabrication. - Commencement of welding. - Before placement of root runs of complete penetration butt welds. - Completion of fabrication before surface preparation. - Surface preparation before shop painting. - Completion of protective coating before delivery to site. Notice – on-site Inspection: Hold points. - Approval of shop drawings by Architect and Structural Engineer - Steelwork on site before erection. - Branch columns after erection. - All structural framing once erected. Witness points - Refer to Structural Engineers specification.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Product substitution Other products: Conform to PRODUCTS, GENERAL, Substitutions in the General requirements worksection.

2.2 MARKING

Identification General: Deliver materials to the site in BlueScope original sealed containers or packaging, legibly marked to show the following: - Manufacturer’s identification. - Product brand name. - Product type. - Quantity. - Product reference code and batch number. - Date of manufacture. - Material composition and characteristics such as volatility, flash point, light fastness, colour and

pattern. Submit technical data sheets if not shown on labels. - Handling and installation instructions. - Safety data sheets.

Page 50: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 50 of 140

2.3 STEEL TYPE AND GRADE

Steel members and sections steel grade table Type of steel Minimum grade Universal beams and columns, parallel flange channels, large angles to AS/NZS 3679.1

300

Flat, small angles, taper flange beams and columns to AS/NZS 3679.1

250

Welded sections to AS/NZS 3679.2 300 Hot rolled plates, floor plates and slabs to AS/NZS 3678

250

Hollow sections to AS/NZS 1163: Circular sections less than 165 mm nominal outside diameter

C250

Hollow sections to AS/NZS 1163: Sections other than the above

C350

GALVASPAN® steel purlins and girts to AS 1397 G450 Z350 or Z450 Steel certification Acceptable evidence: Certified mill test reports, or test certificates issued by the mill in conformance with AS/NZS 1163 clause 13.2.2 for cold formed hollow sections, AS/NZS 3679.1 clause 11.2.2 for hot rolled bars or sections or AS/NZS 3679.2 clause 10.2.3 for welded I sections. Alternative: Have the steel tested by an independent NATA or ILAC accredited testing authority for conformance with the chemical composition and mechanical test requirements of the cited material standard. Testing Requirement: As documented in the Non-destructive testing of bars and sections schedule. REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION AND DRAWINGS.

2.4 PURLINS AND GIRTS

Material General: GALVASPAN® steel or equal Corrosion protection: Zinc coating weight for high exposure Selection: Adopt material selection and design in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Investigate severe environments to ensure correct material specification.

2.5 BOLTS

Bolts, nuts and washers Finish: Hot-dip galvanized, corrosion-free, and in serviceable condition.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

General Requirement: Shop detail and fabricate members so that they can be properly erected. Beam camber General: If beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance, fabricate and erect them with the camber up. Straightening Requirement: If correcting distorted members, conform to the submitted procedures and avoid damage.

Page 51: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 51 of 140

Site work General: Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work, do not fabricate, modify or weld structural steel on site. Identification marks General: Provide marks or other means of identifying each member compatible with the finish, for the setting out, location, erection and connection of the steelwork to conform to the marking plans. Remove all marks and all brands from exposed steelwork as it is to be face finish quality. High strength bolting: If the work includes more than one bolting category, mark high-strength structural bolted connections with a 75 mm wide flash of colour, clear of holes. Cold formed members: Clearly mark material thickness. Monorail beams: Identify and mark rated capacity in conformance with AS 1418.18 clause 5.12.6. Tolerances Measurement: Check tolerances by measurement after fabrication and application of corrosion protection. Conformance: To AS 4100 clause 14.4.

3.2 WELDING

General Standard: To AS/NZS 1554.1. All Shop welding is to be continuous fillet type. These are to be ground flush ready for hot dipped galvanised finish. Weld category Weld categories not documented: Category GP. Weld type Weld type not documented: Submit proposals for weld type and electrodes. Non-destructive weld examination Standard: To AS/NZS 1554.1. Radiographic and ultrasonic examination: By an independent testing authority. Repairs: Repair welds revealed as faulty by non-destructive examination and repeat the examination. Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) table Type of weld and category Examination method Extent (% of total length of

weld type) Shop fillet welds Visual means 100 Site fillet welds Visual means 100 Butt welds, GP Visual means 100 Butt welds, SP Visual means 100 Fillet and butt welds, SP Radiographic or

ultrasonic examination 10

3.3 BOLTING

General Standards: To AS 1110.1, AS 1111.1 and AS/NZS 1252. Bolting category General: As documented in the Bolting category schedule. Connections Connection type: For connections not documented, submit proposals. Bolting category 8.8/TF contact surfaces: Clean, as rolled and free from applied finishes. Anchor bolts General: Provide each anchor bolt with 2 nuts and 2 oversize washers with sufficient thread to permit the levelling nut and washer to be set below the base plate.

Page 52: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 52 of 140

Galvanizing: Galvanize all components. Hexagonal bolts: To AS 1111.1. Hexagonal nuts: To AS 1112.3. Plain washers: To AS 1237.1. Set-out: Set out bolt groups using templates and subject to survey check. Lock nuts General: Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibration and for vertical bolts in tension. Tensioning of bolting categories 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF Method: Use part-turn-of-nut or load indicating washers. Permanent bolting Completion: Bolt only when correct alignment and preset or camber has been achieved.

3.4 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL

General Requirement: Provide AESS as documented in the AESS schedule. Standard: Conform to the requirements of ASI/SCNZ AESS E - AESS Sample specification. Fabrication Requirement: Conform to the requirements of ASI AESS F - AESS Code of practice. Welds: All exposed welds are to be continuous fillet type ground flush for face finish prior to galvanising. Corners and edges: Grind smooth sharp, marred, or roughened corners and edges. All edges to all mild steel plates are to be square and true. Rough surfaces: Deburr and ground smooth.

3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION AND TREATMENT

General Requirement: Conform to the Steel – protective paint coatings and/or Steel – hot-dip galvanized coatings worksections as appropriate. AESS surface preparation: Class 2 blast and to the requirements of ASI AESS F - AESS Code of practice.

3.6 ERECTION

General Standard: To AS 3828. Execution: Make sure that every part of the structure has sufficient design capacity and is stable under construction loads produced by the construction procedure or as a result of construction loads, which are applied. Calculations: Justify the adequacy of the structure to sustain any loads and/or procedures, which may be imposed. The turn down frame for the small shelters is to be fabricated as one complete unit off site. This alos applies to all “branching” columns, branching columns with sump plates and perimeter beams with fascia plates. Refer to architectural details. Temporary work General: Provide all necessary temporary bracing or propping. Temporary connections: Detail required cleats, if not shown on shop drawings. Temporary members: Detail required cleats if not shown on shop drawings. Hand cutting General: If hand cutting of bolt holes is necessary, report and propose alternative options.

Page 53: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Structural Steel

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 53 of 140

Cold-formed purlins Trimming members: Provide to support edges of roof sheeting along hips, valleys and roof penetrations. Movements General: Allow for thermal movements during erection. Site welds Completion: Weld only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved. Overhead welding: If overhead welding is required, submit proposals. Anchor bolts General: For each group of anchor bolts, provide a template with set-out lines clearly marked for positioning the bolts when casting in. Grouting at supports Preparation: Before grouting steelwork to be supported by concrete or masonry, set steelwork on packing or wedges. - Permanent packing or wedges: Form with solid steel or grout of similar strength to the permanent

grout. - Temporary packing or wedges: Remove before completion of grouting. Timing: Grout at supports before the construction of any supported floors, walls, roofing, wall cladding or precast. Temperature: Do not grout if the temperature of the base plate or the footing surface exceeds 35°C. Handling Care: Handle members or components without overstressing or deforming them. Protection: Wrap or otherwise protect members or components to prevent damage to surface finishes during handling and erection. Drifting Limitation: Use drifting only to bring members into position, without enlarging holes or distorting components.

3.7 REPAIRS

General General: Repair finishes to restore the full integrity of each phase and each coating.

3.8 COMPLETION

Tolerances Conformance: After erection is complete confirm conformance with AS 4100 clause 15.3. Temporary connections General: Remove temporary cleats on completion and restore the surface. Warranties Purlins and girts: Submit the GALVASPAN® or equal published product warranties.

Page 54: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Block Constructions

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 54 of 140

BLOCK CONSTRUCTION

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide core filled reinforced concrete block work as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - Preliminaries. - Site Preparation. - Earthworks - Insitu concrete - Structural Engineers Specification and Drawings

2 GENERAL

2.1 CROSS REFERENCES

General General: Conform to the General requirements worksection. Refer to Structural Engineers Documentation Associated worksections Associated worksections: Conform to the following

2.2 STANDARD

General Materials and construction: To AS 3700.

2.3 INSPECTION

Witness points Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Unit type, colour and texture. - Bottoms of cavities, after cleaning out. - Bottoms of core holes, before grouting. - Reinforcement type and diameter. - Positioning of reinforcing before grouting. - Control joints, ready for insertion of joint filler. - Damp-proof courses, in position. - Flashings, in position. - Lintels, in position. - Structural steelwork, including bolts and shelf angles, in position.

2.4 TOLERANCES

Masonry construction Conformance: Conform to AS 3700 Table 11.1.

Page 55: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Block Constructions

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 55 of 140

2.5 BUILT IN ITEMS • Steel door frames – during construction • MS reveal and radiussed head plates – during construction • MS slot windows – during construction • MS external rolled skirting angle – during construction • Concealed toilet cistern – during construction • Semi recessed light fittings

3 PRODUCTS

3.1 MATERIALS

Bricks and blocks Standard: To AS/NZS 4455. Minimum age of clay bricks: 7 days. Mortar materials Admixtures: - Admixtures: To AS 3700 clause 10.4.2.4. Lime: To AS 1672.1. Portland cement: To AS 3972. - Type: GP. Masonry cement: To AS 1316. Proportions: Conform to the Mortar mix table. Sand: To be fine aggregate with low clay content and free from efflorescing salts, selected for colour and grading. Water: To be clean and free from any deleterious matter. White cement: To have iron salts content ≤ 1%. Pigment: To BS EN 12878, and as follows: - Quantity: Less than 10% of the mass of cement in the mix. For light colours: Use off-white cement in the mix. Mortar mix table Mortar class to AS 3700

Cement, lime, sand ratios (by volume) Water thickener

Clay Concrete Calcium silicate

Masonry cement

M3 1:0:4 1:0:4 n/a No

M4 1:0:3 n/a n/a No

Portland cement

M2 1:2:9 n/a n/a No

M3 1:1:6 1:1:6 n/a Optional

1:0:5 1:0:5 1:0:5 Yes

M4 1:0.5:4.5 1:0.5:4.5 n/a Optional

1:0:4 1:0:4 1:0:4 Yes

Page 56: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Block Constructions

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 56 of 140

3.2 COMPONENTS

Steel lintels Angles and flats: To AS/NZS 3679.1. Cold formed proprietary lintels: Designed to AS/NZS 4600. Corrosion protection: To AS/NZS 2699.3. Galvanizing: Do not cut after galvanizing. Wall ties Standard: To AS/NZS 2699.1. - Type: [complete/delete] Corrosive resistance and durability: In conformance with the Corrosion resistance and durability table. Strength classification: - Masonry veneer: Light duty. - Normal cavity construction and at abutments: Medium duty. - Cavities > 60 and < 200 mm wide: Heavy duty. - Cavities > 200 mm wide: [complete/delete] Corrosion resistance and durability Compliance: Conform to the Corrosion resistance and durability table(s), or provide proprietary products with metallic and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance and as follows: - Built-in products: Below damp proof course to be stainless steel 316 or engineered polymer. - Bricks and blocks: Below damp-proof course, and in external leaves in the High corrosivity category,

use ‘Exposure’ category to AS/NZS 4456.10: 1997 Appendix A (Salt attack resistance categories). - Mortar: Below damp-proof course use mortar grade M4 to the Mortar mix table. Corrosion resistance and durability table – Low corrosivity category Situation Steel lintels Wall ties, connectors and

other structural steel accessories above damp proof course

Minimum cement content (mortar grade) above damp proof course

Internal Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2

- Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 - Metallic-coated sheet

Z275/AZ150 - Galvanized wire 300 g/m2 - In line galvanized sections

with after fabrication coating repair ILG/150

M2

External Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2

- Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 - Metallic-coated sheet Z600 - Galvanized wire 470 g/m2

M2

Corrosion resistance and durability table – Medium corrosivity category Situation Steel lintels Wall ties, connectors and

other structural steel accessories above damp proof course

Minimum cement content (mortar grade) above damp proof course

Internal Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2

- Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 - Galvanized wire 300 g/m2 - Metallic-coated sheet

Z275/AZ150

M2

External Galvanize after - Galvanize after fabrication M3

Page 57: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Block Constructions

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 57 of 140

Situation Steel lintels Wall ties, connectors and other structural steel accessories above damp proof course

Minimum cement content (mortar grade) above damp proof course

fabrication 600 g/m2 600 g/m2 - Galvanized wire 470 g/m2

Corrosion resistance and durability table – High corrosivity category Situation Steel lintels Wall ties, connectors and

other structural steel accessories above damp proof course

Minimum cement content (mortar grade) above damp proof course

Internal Galvanize after fabrication 470 g/m2

- Galvanize after fabrication 470 g/m2

M2

External - Stainless 316 - Galvanize after

fabrication 600 g/m2

plus organic coating

- Stainless 316 - Engineered polymer

M4

Connectors and accessories Standard: To AS/NZS 2699.2. Flexible masonry ties: If accommodation of movement is required at control joints and where masonry abuts structural elements such as column faces and slab soffits, provide details. Flashings and damp-proof courses Standard: To AS/NZS 2904.

4 EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL

Mortar mixing General: Measure volumes accurately to achieve the specified proportions. Machine mix for at least six minutes. Protection from contamination General: Protect masonry materials and components from ground moisture and contamination. Bond Type: Stretcher bond. Building in Embedded items: Build in wall ties and accessories as the construction proceeds. If it is not practicable to obtain the required embedment wholly in the mortar joint in hollow unit brickwork or blockwork, fill appropriate cores with grout or mortar. Steel door frames: Fill the backs of jambs and heads solid with mortar as the work proceeds. Monolithic structural action: If two or more adjoining sections of masonry, including intersecting walls, are constructed at different rates or times, rake back or tie the intersections between those sections so that monolithic structural action is obtained in the completed work. Joining to existing General: If jointing to existing work is required, provide a straight joint. Do not tooth new masonry into existing work. Joints Solid and cored units: Lay on a full bed of mortar. Fill perpends solid. Cut mortar flush. Face-shell bed hollow units: Fill perpends solid. Cut mortar flush. Finish: - Externally: Tool to give a dense water-shedding finish. - Internally: If wall is to be plastered, do not rake more than 10 mm to give a key.

Page 58: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Block Constructions

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 58 of 140

- Thickness: 10 mm. Cutting: Set out masonry with joints of uniform width and the minimum of cutting of masonry units. Monolithic structural action General: Provide brick or block header units, except in stretcher bond facework, to AS 3700 clause 4.11.2. Spacing: 600 mm maximum. Location: - At engaged piers. - At engagement of diaphragms with the leaves in diaphragm walls. - At intersections of flanges with shear walls. - At intersections with supporting walls and buttresses. - Between leaves in solid masonry construction. Rate of construction Regulate the rate of construction to eliminate joint deformation, slumping or instability. Rods Set out: Construct masonry to the following rods: - 90 mm high units: 6 courses to 600 mm. - 190 mm high units: 3 courses to 600 mm. Weather protection General: Keep the top surface blockwork covered to prevent the entry of rainwater. Temporary support General: If the final stability of the brickwork or blockwork is dependent on (structural) elements to be constructed after the brickwork or blockwork, provide proposals for temporary support or bracing.

4.2 LINTELS

Location General: Provide lintels to structural engineers details Installation As per structural engineers details and in accordance with best practiceProtection Steel lintels: Steel lintels shall be hot dip galvanized (after fabrication).

4.3 ADJACENT ELEMENTS

Ensure block walls align with insitu RC radiussed corner elements. Failure to do so will mean rejection of one or both elements. This is because the ceramic tiles are to be applied with no visible change alignment.

Page 59: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 59 of 140

RENDERING AND PLASTERING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide plaster finishes as documented. Performance Requirements: - Resistant to impacts expected in use. - Free of irregularities. - Consistent in texture and finish. - Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the application. - Without obvious shrinkage cracks. - As a suitable substrate for the nominated final finish.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Ceramic tiling - Block Construction - Concrete Insitu

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - CRF: Cement render – finish. - CRM: Cement render – medium. - CRS: Cement render – stronger. - CRW: Cement render – weaker. - GPF: Gypsum plaster – finish. Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Base coat: A plaster coat applied before the application of the finish coat. - Bonding treatment: A treatment of a substrate which improves adhesion of a plaster system. - Finish coat: The final coat of a coating system. - Finishing treatment: The treatment applied to a finish coat which may include processes and results. - Plaster: A mixture of binders, aggregate and water which are applied to substrates in a plastic state

and dry and cure to a hard surface which may subsequently be decorated: . Cement plaster: Contains Portland cement as the principal binder. . Gypsum plaster: Contains hydrated or anhydrous calcium sulfate as the principal binder.

- Plastering: The process of coating the framing or solid surfaces of a building with a plastic material which hardens and then may be decorated or remain self-finished.

- Plastering system: One or more coats of plaster and associated treatments comprising some or all of the following in sequence: . Base coat 1 or 2. . Bonding treatment. . Finish coat.

Page 60: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 60 of 140

. Finishing treatment. - Render, rendering: Plaster, plastering, usually single coat and usually cement:lime:sand. - Substrate: The surface to which a material or product is applied.

1.4 TOLERANCES

Tolerances table Description Alignment Tolerance Walls and other vertical structures

Vertical 6 mm in 2400 mm

Reveals sides Vertical 3 mm in 1800 mm Reveals head up to 1800 mm Horizontal 3 mm in 1800 mm Reveals head over 1800 mm Horizontal 5 mm max Reveals, piers, beams, wall stop ends up to 300 mm

Square 3 mm max

Reveals, piers, beams, wall stop ends over 300 mm

Square 5 mm max

Radius of corners Round Should not vary by more than ± 10% over the length of the arris.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Samples Plaster systems: Prepare prototypes of each plaster system complete with beads and other embedded items: - Size: 1200 x 2400 mm.

1.6 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Prototypes ready for inspection. - Substrates immediately before applying base coats. - Finish treatments before decoration.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Accessories Beads: Provide metal proprietary sections manufactured for fixing to substrates and/or embedding in the plaster to form and protect plaster edges and junctions. Metal lath: Provide a proprietary product manufactured from raised expanded metal for use with plaster: - Mass/unit area: 1.84 kg/m2 or greater. - Material thickness: 0.70 mm or greater. - Mesh size: 9.5 x 28.6 mm. Metallic-coatings to AS 1397: For beads or lath in cement plaster: To the Corrosion resistance and durability table. Admixtures Plasticisers or workability agents: Do not use in cement plasters.

Page 61: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 61 of 140

Aggregates Sand: Fine, sharp, well-graded sand with a clay content between 1% and 5%, and free from efflorescing salts. Sand grading for base coat plaster table Sieve size Percent passing

Minimum Maximum 4.75 mm 100 100 2.36 mm 90 100 1.18 mm 60 90 600 µm 35 70 300 µm 10 30 150 µm 0 5 75 µm 0 3 Plaster for autoclaved aerated concrete General: Provide a proprietary product manufactured for use with the wall system. Bonding products General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement-based plaster to solid substrates. Cement Standard: To AS 3972. Type: GP. Colouring products General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for colouring cement plaster. Integral pigment proportion: 5% maximum weight of cement. Cornice cement General: Provide a proprietary product manufactured for use with the cornice. Cornices Cast plaster: Proprietary item. Corrosion resistance and durability Compliance: To the Corrosion resistance and durability table or provide proprietary products with metallic and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance and as follows: - Galvanize: To AS/NZS 4680. Corrosion resistance and durability table Atmospheric corrosivity category to AS 4312

Metal lath, beads and embedded items

Minimum cement content (mix type) above damp-proof course

C1 and C2 Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 Stainless 316

CRW

Powder coated aluminium CRM C3 Stainless 316 Powder coated

aluminium CRM

C4 and T1 Stainless 316 Powder coated aluminium

CRS

1 Avoid organic coating in Category T zones. Curing products General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with the plaster system. Gypsum plaster General: Provide a proprietary product containing calcium sulfate hemihydrate with additives to modify setting.

Page 62: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 62 of 140

Lime Limes for building: To AS 1672.1. Lime putty General: Prepare lime putty as follows: - Stand dry hydrate of lime to AS 1672.1 and water for 24 hours or more without drying out. - Stand quicklime and water for 14 days or more without drying out. Mixes General: Select a mix proportion to suit the conditions of application. Measurement: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water. Plaster mixing: Machine mix for 3 to 6 minutes. Strength of successive coats: Make sure successive coats are no richer in binder than the coat to which they are applied. Mix proportion table – Cement render, by volume Mix type Substrate Upper and lower limits of

proportions by volume Cement Lime Sand

Single or multi-coat systems with integral finishing treatments Base coats in multi-coat systems with cement or gypsum finishes

CRS Dense and smooth concrete and masonry

1 1 0 0.5 3 4.5

CRM Regular clay or concrete masonry

1 1 0.5 1 4.5 6

CRW Lightweight concrete masonry and other weak substrates

1 1 1 2 6 9

Second coat - Internal

CRF Cement render base coats 1 1 1 2 6 9

Second coat - External

CRF Cement render base coats 1 1 1 2 5 6

Mix proportion table – Gypsum finish coat, by volume Mix type Substrate Upper and lower limits of proportions by

volume Gypsum Cement Lime

putty Sand

Gypsum finish coats

GPF Cement render base coats 1 1 - - 1.5 2 - -

Mix proportion table – Gypsum finish coat, by weight Gypsum plaster (kg) Lime putty (kg) 17 25 34 50 51 75 Control joint products General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with the plastering system and to accommodate the anticipated movement of the substrates and/or the plaster. Water General: Clean and free from any deleterious matter.

Page 63: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 63 of 140

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Substrates General: Provide substrates as follows: - Clean and free from any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of plaster. - If framed or discontinuous, support members in full lengths without splicing. - If solid or continuous, remove excessive projections and fill voids and hollows with plaster stronger

than the first coat and not weaker than the substrate. Absorbent substrates: If suction is excessive, control it by dampening without over-wetting, and do not plaster substrates showing surface moisture. Dense concrete: If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key, roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 2 mm of the laitance and expose the aggregate before applying a bonding treatment. Painted surfaces: Remove paint and hack the surface at close intervals. Untrue substrates: If the substrate is not sufficiently true for conformity with the thickness limits for the plaster system, or has excessively uneven suction resulting from variations in the composition of the substrate, apply additional coats without exceeding the thickness limits for the substrate or system. Beads Location: Fix beads as follows: - Angle beads: At all external corners. - Drip beads: At all lower terminations of external plaster. - Beads for control of movement: At all control joints. - Stop beads: At all terminations of plaster and junctions with other materials or plaster systems. Joints in beads: Provide dowels to maintain alignment. Mechanical fixing to substrate: ≤ 300 mm centres. Bonding treatment General: If bonding treatment is required, throw a wet mix onto the background. Mix proportions to the following: - Cement plaster (cement:sand): 1:2. - Gypsum plaster (gypsum:sand): 1:2. Curing: Keep continuously moist for 5 days or more and allow to dry before applying plaster coats. Thickness: ≥ 3 < 6 mm. Embedded items General: To the Corrosion resistance and durability table. If there are water pipes and other embedded items, sheath them to permit thermal movement. Lath Location: Provide lath as follows: - Chases: If chases or recesses are 50 mm wide or greater, fix metal lath extending 75 mm or more

beyond each side of the chase or recess. - Metal and other non-porous substrates: Fix metal lath to provide a key. Installation: Fix lath as follows: - General: Run the long way of the mesh across supports with strands sloping downwards and

inwards from the intended face of the plaster. - Fixing: Mechanically fix at centres of 150 mm or less. - Laps: Tie with 1.25 mm galvanized wire at centres of 150 mm or less. Do not stop edges of sheets

at corners but bend around. - On solid substrates: Space the lath 5 mm or more clear of the substrate. - Support spacing: ≤ 400 mm.

Page 64: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 64 of 140

3.2 APPLICATION

Plastering Base coats: Scratch-comb each base coat in two directions when it has stiffened. Metal lath: Press the plaster through the apertures of expanded metal lath and wings of beads. Incidental work General: Return plaster into reveals, beads, sills, recesses and niches. Plaster faces, ends, and soffits of projections in the substrate, such as string courses, sills, pilasters and corbels. Run neatly finished throating on soffits of external projections. Trim around openings. Plaster exposed internal surfaces of built-in cupboards. Joining up General: If joining up is required, make sure joints are imperceptible in the finished work after decoration. Control joints General: Provide joints in the finish to coincide with control joints in the substrate. Make sure the joint in the substrate is not bridged during plastering. Size: - Depth: Extend the joint right through the plaster and reinforcement to the substrate. - Width: 3 mm, or the same width as the substrate joint, whichever is greater. Damp-proof courses: Do not continue plaster across damp-proof courses. Plastering on metal lath: Provide control joints to divide the plastering area into rectangular panels of 10 m2 or less. V-joints: Provide V-joints, cut right through the plaster to the substrate, at the following locations: - Abutments with metal door frames. - Abutments with other finishes. - Junctions between different substrates. Plaster thickness table Substrate Cement render, total thickness

of single or multi-coat work (mm)

Gypsum/lime plaster (mm)

Dense concrete walls 15 max 3 max Dense concrete ceilings 9 max 3 max Brickwork and blockwork 12 min 3 max Lightweight concrete and blocks 12 min 3 max Metal lath measured from the face of the lath.

18 min 3 max

Temperature General: If the ambient temperature is less than 10°C or more than 30°C, make sure the temperature of mixes, substrates and reinforcement at the time of application are between 5°C and 35°C.

3.3 FINISHES

Finishing treatments Type A Amenities Pavilion: Cement render is not face finish but a substrate for ceramic tiles. Type B Amenities Pavilion: Cement render as noted above plus as wall finish ready for paint in the Rangers Station. Set plaster only required for the suspended plasterboard ceiling in the Type B Rangers station

Page 65: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Rendering + Plastering

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 65 of 140

3.4 COMPLETION

Curing General: Prevent premature or uneven drying out and protect from the sun and wind. Keeping moist: If a proprietary curing agent is not used, keep the plaster moist as follows: - Base coats and single coat systems: Keep continuously moist for 2 days and allow to dry for 5 days

before applying further plaster coats. - Finish coats: Keep continuously moist for 2 days.

Page 66: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Light Steel Framing

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 66 of 140

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide light steel roof framing, as documented and as follows: - Suitable for having soffit linings and roofing fixed to it. - In conformance with the documented performance criteria. - Independently designed and documented. - Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected framing.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements.

1.3 STANDARDS

General Design, materials and protection: To AS/NZS 4600. Residential and low-rise steel framing: To NASH-1 (National Association of Steel Housing) and NASH-2.

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in the NASH-1 and NASH-2. Standards apply.

1.5 TOLERANCES

General Manufacturing, assembly and installation tolerances: To NASH-1 Appendix D and NASH-2 Appendix A.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Design General: Where the structural drawings define performance criteria, submit independent design, documentation and certification from a professional engineer including certification for the erected work. Reactions: Submit the location and magnitude of reactions that are to be accommodated by the support structure. Floor and wall frame member sizes: Submit a schedule of proposed member sizes, certified as meeting stated project, and AS/NZS 4600 requirements for span, spacings and loadings. Shop drawings General: Submit shop drawings, to a scale that best describes the detail, certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has been carried out in accordance with documented project, and AS/NZS 4600, requirements for the documented configurations and loadings.

Page 67: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Light Steel Framing

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 67 of 140

1.7 INSPECTION

Witness points Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Steel framing erected on site before lining or cladding.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Storage and handling Requirement: Transport all components to site and store if required in a manner so as not to damage or distort the components.

2.2 COMPONENTS

Cold-formed steel framing General: Cold-form sections from steel, metallic-coated to AS 1397. Corrosion protection: To BCA 3.4.2.2. Framing members Cold-formed steel framing: For proprietary systems, comply with NASH-1 and NASH-2. Fascias and barge boards Custom MS profile as documented, welded to perimeter beams.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Fabrication Length: Cut members accurately to length so that they fit firmly against abutting members. Service holes: Form holes by drilling or punching. Bushes: Provide plastic bushes or grommets to site cut holes. Swarf: Immediately remove swarf and other debris from cold-formed steel framing. Fastening Type: Select from the following: - Bolting. - Self-drilling, self-tapping screws. - Blind rivets. - Proprietary clinching system. - Structural adhesives. - Welding. On-site welded connections are not permitted. Welding Burning: Avoid procedures that result in greater than localised burning of the sheets or framing members. Prefabricated frames General: Protect frames from damage or distortion during erection. Metal separation General: Install lagging to separate non-ferrous service pipes and accessories from the framing. Unseasoned or CCA treated timber General: Do not fix in contact with framing without fully painting the timber and/or the steel. Earthing Permanent earthing: Required.

Page 68: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Light Steel Framing

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 68 of 140

Temporary earthing: Provide temporary earthing during erection until the permanent earthing is installed. Protection General: Restore coatings which have been damaged by welding or other causes. Thoroughly clean affected areas back to base metal and coat with a zinc rich organic primer. Grommets: Provide grommets to isolate piping and wiring from cold-formed steel framing.

3.2 WALL FRAMING

Wall studs General: Provide wall framing as per structural engineers documentation to support wall cladding (Timber cladding to both sides of partition walls). Additional support General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for support and fixing of lining, cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings. Flashings Location: Provide flashings to external openings sufficient to prevent the entry of moisture. Form trays at the ends of sill flashings. Refer to detail.

3.3 ROOF FRAMING

Beam framing General: Construct framing for flat or pitched roofs where the ceiling follows the roof line, consisting of rafters or purlins supporting both ceiling and roof covering. Anti-ponding Requirement: Fix appropriate members to the tops of framing at the rear of fascias, to prevent sagging of and ponding on the sarking. Additional support General: Provide additional top hat suspended frame members set out to suit soffit lining layout Battens Requirement: Supply and fix battens suitable for span, spacing and proposed roofing material.

3.4 ROOF TRIM

Fascia, valley gutter and barge boards Requirement: Supply and fix fascia, valley gutter in conformance with the manufacturer’s requirements and architects details.

3.5 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: On completion of framing remove debris from any gaps between members.

Page 69: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Steel Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 69 of 140

STEEL – HOT-DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide hot-dip galvanized coatings, as documented and as follows: - Controls atmospheric corrosion to structural steelwork or steel products in the time to first

maintenance.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Preliminaries - Light steel framing - Structural steel

1.3 STANDARDS

General Coating: To AS/NZS 4680. Coating on fasteners: To AS 1214. Durability: To AS/NZS 2312.2. Metal finishing Threaded fasteners coating mass/thickness minimum: To AS 1214 Table 2.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Execution details Holes and lifting lugs: If holes and lifting lugs are required to facilitate handling, filling, venting and draining during galvanizing, submit details on size and location. Detailing features: If design and fabrication features of the items to be galvanized leads to difficulties during galvanizing, identify these and submit details for improvement.

2 EXECUTION

2.1 GENERAL

Care Dimensional change: If design and fabrication features of items to be galvanized are likely to lead to dimensional change or distortion, identify these and submit proposals for its minimisation. Embrittlement: Take due care to avoid embrittlement of susceptible steels. Mechanical properties: Avoid mechanical damage. Make sure that mechanical properties of the base metal do not change. Surface preparation Surface contaminants and coatings generally: Chemical clean, then acid pickle. Chemical cleaning: To AS 1627.1. Acid pickling: To AS 1627.5.

Page 70: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Steel Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 70 of 140

- Inhibitor: Required. Post treatment General: Passivate. Drilling after completion of hot-dip galvanizing Repair: Prime drill hole surfaces to AS/NZS 4680 clause 8 before the surfaces begin to corrode. Coating Threaded fasteners: To AS 1214. Structural sections Hollow sections: Provide seal plates with breather holes to the recommendations of AS/NZS 2312.2 Appendix A. Surface finish Standard: To AS/NZS 4680 clause 7. Coating quality: This is an exposed face finish. Continuous, adherent, smooth or evenly textured and uniform, free from defects detrimental to the end use of the finished article, such as lumps, blisters, gritty areas, uncoated spots, acids and black spots, dross and flux. - Silicon killed steels: Dull grey is acceptable. Friction-type bolted connections: Treat coated contact surfaces to achieve the required design slip factor, without removing excessive coating thickness. - Contact surface preparation: To GAA After fabrication hot dip galvanizing Chapter 4. Slip factor test: To AS 4100 Appendix J. Surplus zinc on fastener threads: Remove. Coating repair Rejection: If uncoated surfaces or areas damaged by handling at the galvanizing plant exceed the limits specified for repair in AS/NZS 4680 clause 8, reject the galvanizing. Extent and methods: To AS/NZS 4680 clause 8. Preparation for paint finishes Coarse preparation: Remove spikes, and make sure edges are free from lumps and runs. Light sweep blasting before painting: Required. - Maximum zinc removal: 10 µm. - Abrasive grade (range): 150 to 180 µm. - Abrasive type: Clean ilmenite or garnet. - Blasting angle to surface: 45° maximum. - Blast pressure (maximum): 275 kPa. - Distance of nozzle from surface (range): 350 to 400 mm. - Nozzle type: 10 to 13 mm minimum diameter venturi type.

2.2 SITE WORK

Site welding Grinding of edges: Permitted. Weld areas: Reinstate coating to AS/NZS 4680 clause 8. Site coating reinstatement Rejection: If any item has damaged areas exceeding the limits specified for repair in AS/NZS 4680 clause 8.1, reject the object. Extent: Areas damaged by transport, site welding, site flame cutting, site handling, or erection. Method: To AS/NZS 4680 clause 8.

Page 71: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Soffit Lining

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 71 of 140

SOFFIT LINING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide exterior grade matt anodised 3mm thick aluminium sheets as soffit lining to both Pavilion types. Performance Roofing and cladding: Install all sheeting and associated trim angles with no damage to the anodised finish.

1.2 STANDARDS

General Suspended ceilings: To AS/NZS 2785

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS/NZS 1891.1 and AS/NZS 5532 apply.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Shop drawings Provide shop drawings from perforated sheet supplier indicating each panel type and the dimension of the margin for each sheet type. This to be in line with Architects panel layout. Samples

- Soffit lining open joints: Install four soffit panels with nominated open joints and specified edge fixing detail for inspection and approval. See Hold Points.

Warranties Requirement: Submit the manufacturer’s published product warranties for the aluminium and the anodising.

1.5 INSPECTION

Hold Points Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Shop drawing issue - Installation of 4 off sample sheets showing typical panels to panel joint and panel to edge. - Installation of 2 off sample sheets into turn down showing edge condition and panel to panel joints. Witness Points Completed installation of one triangular bay prior to commencement of next bay.

Page 72: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Soffit Lining

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 72 of 140

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Identification General: Mark all soffit sheets to identify to approved layout drawings. This is to ensure correct panel layout is achieved.

2.2 SOFFIT LINING

Soffit Lining Soffit lining to both Amenities Pavilions is to a perforated aluminium sheet product equivalent to Arrow Metal P240 custom perforated sheeting. Custom sheeting is required as a consistent narrow margin is required for ALL sheet edges in the layout. The sheeting is to be in a 25 micron natural satin anodised finish by Sapphire Aluminium or equivalent The aluminium angles that are required to trim the soffit lining are to be anodised equal to soffit lining. Panel sheet dimensions are as shown on the drawings. The margin to all edges of all sheets is to be consistent and as close to 6mm wide as the set pitch allows. The panels are to be set out in line with architectural drawings. Typically panel to panel junctions will be a 3mm open joints. Typically panel to roof edge junctions are 8mm. Panels will be mechanically fixed using a suitable gauge 316 grade bi-metal wafer head tek screw equivalent to Thomas Warburton type. The fixings will be at equal set centres as per layout drawings. The soffit lining is to be fixed to a proprietary fit for purpose top hat frame that is suspended from the purlins and beams. The top hat framing is to be set out to suit the panel layouts. Care is to be taken not to damage the anodised finish when installing the panels. Workmanship

- The Contractor is to inspect all sheets on delivery to insure panels are undamaged and that margins are consistent and in line with requirements.

- Ensure all concealed top hat suspended framing is set out to suit panel layout. - Ensure all edge trims are in the correct location to achieve the required detail. - Ensure all panels are correctly positioned with all joints in a true line with a consistent open

gap in accordance with architectural drawings. - Drill additional fixing holes to align with perforation patterns (ie increase size of existing hole to

required diameter to allow for the fixing of proprietary tensile mesh fixing hardware).

Page 73: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Suspended Ceilings

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 73 of 140

SUSPENDED CEILING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

2 GENERAL

2.1 AIMS

Responsibilities General: - Provide a plasterboard ceiling to the Rangers Station

2.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General General: Conform to the General requirements worksection.

2.3 STANDARDS

General Suspended ceilings: To AS/NZS 2785. Luminaire and air diffuser interface: To AS 2946.

2.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of: - The completed ceiling. -

3 PRODUCTS

3.1 GENERAL

Plasterboard Standard: To AS/NZS 2588.

4 EXECUTION

4.1 FIXING SYSTEM

Fixing system Failure: Provide a ceiling system such that failure of any one suspension point does not cause a progressive failure of the ceiling. Ceiling is directly fixed to roof framing in accordance with best practice. Services Support: Space the support members as required by the loads on the system and the type of ceiling, and allow for the installation of light fittings.

Page 74: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Suspended Ceilings

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 74 of 140

Protection General: Protect existing work from damage during the installation. Stability General: Install the ceilings level; and fix so that under normal conditions there is no looseness or rattling of ceiling components. Fasteners General: Install fasteners so that they are not visible in the finished ceiling. Do not use screw fasteners in materials supporting hangers less than 3 mm thick. Prefinishes General: Repair damaged prefinishes by recoating. 3.2 PLASTERBOARD LINING

Installation Gypsum plasterboard: To AS/NZS 2589.1. Fibre reinforced gypsum plaster: To AS/NZS 2589.2. Suspended flush ceilings: Fix using screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling members or support frame. Joints Flush joints: Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape. Butt joints: Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking. External corner joints: Make joints over metallic-coated steel corner beads. Control joints: Install purpose-made metallic-coated control joint beads at not more than 12 m centres in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural movement joints. Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required. 3.4 TRIM General General: Provide trim such as beads, mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining components, finishes and adjacent surfaces. Plasterboard / Wall junction All ceiling and wall junctions are to be square set.

Page 75: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Timberwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 75 of 140

TIMBERWORK

1 GENERAL

1.1 CROSS REFERENCES

General General: Conform to the General requirements work sections.

- Partitions - Metalwork

1.2 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply. - Plywood: To AS/NZS 4491. - ‘Standard trade common names’: To AS/NZS 1148. - Groups of timbers: Terms employed for that purpose in relevant Australian standards.

1.3 SCOPE

Work Included: Provision of timber works in accordance with this specification, the Contract drawings and as instructed by WSPT. This is to include materials and work to construct the timber battens external wall screens and the cladding to the toilet partitions and cubicle doors. In addition it is to include design , materials and work to construct various timber blocks and frames . This is a performance specification and the Contract drawings show generic design principles and design intent only.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Materials Rainforest species: Submit source certification. Pressure preservative treatment: For timber required to be pressure treated, submit a certificate or other satisfactory evidence showing that the timber has been treated. For all timber treatments and finishes as specified in finishes schedule, samples must be provided for approval prior to installation. All Timber Species: Submit source certification. Recycled Timber - 135mm x 45mm Recycled Blackbutt Class 1 hardwood vertical timber battens set into MS frame to

form external screen walls. - 100mm x 19mm Recycled Blackbutt Class 2 hardwood vertical timber boards to end partition wall of

male WC partitions. - 100mm x 12mm Recycled Blackbutt Class 2 hardwood vertical timber boards to WC doors Documents Contractor to provide shop drawings of all timber panels as shown on architectural drawings for approval.

Page 76: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Timberwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 76 of 140

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TIMBER

Durability General: Provide timbers having natural durability appropriate to the conditions of use, or preservative-treated timber of equivalent durability. Natural durability class of heartwood: To AS 5604. Minimum requirements: - Class 1: Timbers in contact with ground. - Class 2: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected

from moisture but exposed to the weather. - Class 3: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected

with a finish, and well maintained. - Class 4: Timbers fully protected from moisture, indoors, above ground, and well ventilated. Lyctus susceptible timbers General: Do not provide timbers containing Lyctus susceptible sapwood. Preservative treatment Glued laminated timber products: To AS/NZS 1604.5. - Hazard classification: To Table A1. Laminated veneer lumber (LVL): To AS/NZS 1604.4. - Hazard classification. To Table A1. Plywood: To AS/NZS 1604.3. - Hazard classification: To Table A1. Reconstituted wood-based products: To AS/NZS 1604.2. - Hazard classification: To Table A1. Sawn and round timber: To AS 1604.1. - Hazard classification: To Table D1. Water-repellent treatment Repellent: to APAS 0096. Moisture content Tolerance: Make milled and dressed products from timbers seasoned as follows: - To within 3% of the equilibrium moisture content appropriate to the timber and its intended

conditions of use. - To 10 – 15% moisture content. - With no more than 3% difference between any 2 pieces in any one group. Test: To AS/NZS 1080.1. Protection: Protect timber and timber products stored on site from moisture and weather. For milled, prefinished, prefabricated and similar elements which are protected in the final structure, provide temporary weather protection until the permanent covering is in place. Finished sizes General: Provide milled timbers with actual dimensions which are at least the stated dimensions, except for dimensions qualified by a term such as ‘nominal’ or ‘out of’ to which industry standards for finished sizes apply. Unseasoned timber General: If unseasoned timber is used, or if variations in moisture are likely, allow for shrinkage, swelling and differential movement. Surface finish Hardwood: To AS 2796.1 Table B1. Softwood: To AS 4785.1 Table B1.

Page 77: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Timberwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 77 of 140

Materials All timber to be supplied for the project shall be recycled timber or timber sourced from sustainable managed forests and the Contractor shall supply Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or Australian Forest Standards (AFS) written certification to the Superintendent.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

Ploughing General: Back plough boards liable to warp (e.g. if exposed externally on one face). Make the width, depth and distribution of ploughs appropriate to the dimensions of the board and degree of exposure. External Timber Batten Screens Refer to drawings for design intent. Generally: This is a performance specification. The drawn details and construction description represent design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing. The vertical timber rails are set within a custom MS surround frame and the vertical rails are fixed to this surround frame. The battens are set out to be tapered to follow the tapering MS surround frame. Each surround frame has a custom diagonal angle welded to the frame as a brace and also as a datum trim edge for the timber battens to align to. Closed screen: The screen wall running adjacent to the block walls is a closed screen and this achieved by installing smaller battens between the main vertical rails and setting them back so they align with the rear edge of the main rails. These are nominally 45mm deep x the dimension determined by the each spacings. Open screen: The open screen has two rows of main vertical battens that align and this is to allow for battens to run from the front to the back of the angles surround frame. This frame is tapered so the rear batten dimensions alter to suit. Refer to drawings for design intent. The Male Amenities need the open screen to be partially “closed” using the same method as described in “Closed screen” to provide privacy to the Urinal zone. The assembly consists for suitable metal threaded rods and spacers of equal spacing as described in the drawings. Holes re to be drilled in each batten for the threaded rods and spacer.

The battens are spaced equally Apply penetrative treatment to all cut timber prior to final installation and also apply a topical coat of Sikaflex Sikapro (concrete grey colour) to all cut end grain of each piece of dressed timber prior to final installation. This also applies to junctions between timber and metalwork. Internal Timber cladding Refer to drawings for design intent. Generally: This is a performance specification. The drawn details and construction description represent design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing. The vertical timber lining boards are mechanically and adhesive fixed to the toilet partition walls and toilet cubicle doors.

Page 78: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Timberwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 78 of 140

Toilet Partition Walls- Internal and External: Nominal 100mm x 19mm timber boards mechanically and adhesive fixed to 15mm plywood substrate Set out to ensure full equal width boards. Cubicle Doors: Nominal 100mm x 12mm timber boards mechanically and adhesive fixed to 40mm exterior grade solid core door. Cap top and bottom edges in timber. Finish: Dressed finish to all faces. Security Gates Refer to drawings for design intent Generally: This is a performance specification. The drawn details and construction description represent design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing. These gates are steel framed and have vertical timber battens as a screen that are equal to the dimensions of the adjacent timber external batten screen. The battens are spaced to match the external screen and use an equal spacer, threaded rod system.

4 TIMBER FINISH

4.1 GENERALLY

Refer to drawings for design intent. Proprietary general purpose clear wood preservative and water repellent to AS1604.1 and AS3360 – Timber Plus CE102 Clear Wood Preservative to preserve timber from weathering , decay , termite and fungal attack.

4.2 ANTI GRAFFITI FINISH

The Contractor shall provide an anti graffiti treatment to all exposed surfaces of timber battens and cladding. The Anti Graffiti treatment is to be equal to “No More Graffiti” being a wax based sacrificial coating by Adept Restoration Services or equal. Tests are to be conducted prior to the application of the selected treatment to test for compatibility between the anti graffiti treatment and the preservative treatment. The Contractor is to then advise of any compatibility issues and if necessary propose an alternative. Once approval the application to is to be in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions.

Page 79: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 79 of 140

CERAMIC TILING

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide tiling systems to walls as documented. Performance Requirements: - Consistent in colour and finish. - Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation. - Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb. - Direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets without leakage to the substrate or

adjacent areas.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. Conform to the following LATICRETE Specifications in Appendix X - Laticrete General Commercial, short form- Public Convenience Specification - Laticrete 315 Premium Floor N Wall thin set mortar specification - Laticrete 3701 Mortar Admix - Laticrete SpectraLOCK PRO Grout Specification

1.3 STANDARDS

Tiling General: Conform to the documented recommendations of those parts of AS 3958.1 which are referenced in this worksection.

1.4 TOLERANCES

Completed tiling Standard: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.4.6. Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria

Alignment: Deviation of the finished tiles from a 3 m straight edge laid against any joints

< 3 mm

Flatness: Deviation of any plane surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction on an area of uniform grade

< 3 mm

Lippage: - Unpolished tiles - Polished tiles 300 x 300 mm or less - Polished tiles over 300 x 300 mm

< 2 mm < 1 mm, with 5% not exceeding 1.5 mm < 1.5 mm, with 5% not exceeding 2 mm

Page 80: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 80 of 140

1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Samples General: Submit labelled samples of tiles, including fittings, accessories, grout and sealants, illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish. Tests Type tests: Submit results, as follows: - Site test completed surfaces to current AS Standard.

1.6 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Substrate immediately before tiling. - Trial set-outs before execution. - Control joints before sealing and grouting. - Grout and sealant colours before application.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MARKING

Identification General: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer’s original sealed containers legibly marked to show the following: - Manufacturer’s identification. - Product brand name. - Product type. - Dimensions and quantity. - Product reference code and batch number. - Date of manufacture. - Material composition and characteristics such as volatility, flash point, light fastness, colour and

pattern. - Handling and installation instructions.

2.2 TILES AND ACCESSORIES

Tiles Standard: To AS ISO 13006. Tactile ground surface indicators: To AS/NZS 1428.4.1. Coves, nosings and skirtings: Provide matching stop-end and internal and external angle tiles moulded for that purpose. Exposed edges: Purpose-made border tiles with the exposed edge (whether round, square or cushion) glazed to match the tile face. If such tiles are not available, mitre tiles on external corners.

2.3 ADHESIVES

General Standard: To AS ISO 13007.1. Type General: Provide adhesives compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered. Prohibited uses: Do not provide the following combinations: - Cement-based adhesives on wood, metal, painted or glazed surfaces, gypsum-based plaster.

Page 81: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 81 of 140

- Organic solvent-based adhesives on painted surfaces. - Organic PVC-based adhesives and organic natural rubber latex adhesives in damp or wet

conditions. - PVA (polyvinyl acetate) based adhesives in wet areas or externally.

2.4 MORTAR

Materials Refer to Appendix for Laticrete information

2.5 GROUT

Type Refer to Appendix for Laticrete information

2.6 CONTROL JOINTS

Control joint materials General: Allow for vertical tile join at insitu corner element and block wall substrate to be silicone if substrate treatment requires a control joint. The intention is to conceal any required control joint.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTRATES

Drying and shrinkage General: Before tiling, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and shrinkage) for these substrates: - Concrete slabs: 42 days. - Concrete blockwork: 28 days. - Toppings on slabs and rendering on brick or blockwork: A further 21 days. - Rendering on swimming pool shell: A further 28 days minimum.

3.2 PREPARATION

Standard Preparation: To AS 3958.1 Section 4. Ambient temperature General: If the ambient temperature is less than 5°C or greater than 35°C, do not lay tiles. Substrates without wet area membranes General: Conform to the following: - Clean off of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles. - If framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing. - If solid or continuous: . Remove excessive projections. . Fill voids and hollows greater than 10 mm with abrupt edges with a cement:sand mix not stronger

than the substrate or weaker than the bedding. . Fill depressions less than 10 mm with a latex modified cementitious product and eliminate

feathering by scabbling the edges. Absorbent substrates: If suction is excessive, control it by dampening but avoid over-wetting and do not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface moisture.

Page 82: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 82 of 140

Dense concrete: If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key, roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 3 mm of the surface and expose the aggregate; then apply a bonding treatment. Substrates with wet area membranes General: Make sure substrates are as follows: - Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles. - Compatible with all components of the floor system.

3.3 TILING GENERALLY

Sequence Fix all MS trim angles at base and head prior to tiling to ensure alignment. Cutting and laying Cutting: Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings and at margins where necessary. Drill holes without damaging tile faces. Cut recesses for fittings such as soap holders. Rub edges smooth without chipping. Laying: Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings, and other finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Remove tile spacers before grouting. Variations General: Distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing tiles or tile batches before laying. Protection Floor tiles: Keep traffic off floor tiles until the bedding has set and attained its working strength. Cleaning: Keep the work clean as it proceeds and protect finished work from damage. Bath ventilation General: Ventilate the space below fully enclosed baths with at least 2 vermin proof ventilating tiles.

3.4 SETTING OUT

Tile joints Joint widths: Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths within the following limits: - Floors: . Dry pressed tiles: 3 mm. . Extruded tiles: 6 mm. . Vitrified: 3 to 5 mm. . Quarry tiles: 6 to 12 mm. . Chemical resistant epoxy jointed tiling: 5 to 6 mm.

- Large and/or irregular floor tiles: 6 to 12 mm. - Mounted mosaics: To match mounting pattern. - Walls: . Dry pressed tile: 1.5 mm. . Extruded tile: 6 mm.

Joint alignment: Set out tiling with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb. Joint position: Set out tiles from the centre of the floor or wall to be tiled. Margins General: Provide whole or purpose-made tiles at margins where practicable, otherwise, set out to give equal margins of cut tiles. If margins less than half a tile width are unavoidable, locate the cut tiles where they are least conspicuous.

Page 83: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 83 of 140

Fixtures General: If possible position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles. Continue tiling fully behind fixtures which are not built in to the tiling surface. Before tiling make sure that fixtures interrupting the tile surfaces are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the tile layout.

3.5 BEDDING

Standard Cement mortar: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.5. Adhesive: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.6. Preparation of tiles Adhesive bedding: Fix tiles dry; do not soak. Mortar bedding: Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has disappeared. Terracotta tiles: Use pre-sealed tiles or apply a breathable sealer and lay dry. If a final sealed finish is selected, use a compatible laying sealer. Bedding General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile, the substrate, the conditions of service, and which leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate. Form falls integral with the substrate. Thin adhesive beds General: Provide only if the substrate deviation is less than 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge. Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded. Thickness: 1.5 to 3 mm. Thick adhesive beds General: Provide on substrates with deviations up to 6 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge, and with tiles having deep keys or frogs. Nominal thickness: 6 mm. Adhesive bedding application General: Apply adhesive by notched trowel to walls and floors and direct to tiles if required, to provide evenly distributed coverage after laying as follows: - Domestic internal walls: > 65%. - Domestic internal floors: > 80%. - Other wall and floors: > 90%. - Wet areas and bench tops: 100%. Pattern of distribution of adhesive: To the recommendations of AS 3958.1 clause 5.6.4.3. Verify by examining one tile in ten as work proceeds. Wall tile spacers: Do not use spacer types that inhibit the distribution of adhesive. Curing: Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer before grouting or allowing foot traffic. Mortar beds For floor tiles: Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the cement is damp, or spread a thin slurry of neat cement, or cement-based thin bed adhesive, on to the tile back. Do not use mortar after initial set has occurred. - Nominal thickness: 20 to 40 mm. Thick reinforced beds: Place mortar bed in two layers, and incorporate the mesh reinforcement in the first layer.

Page 84: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Ceramic Tiles

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 84 of 140

3.6 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT

General Requirement: Provide control joints carried through the tile and the bedding to the recommendations of AS 3958.1 clause 5.4.5 and as follows: - Wall location: . Over structural control joints. . At junctions with different substrate materials when the tiling is continuous.

- Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate. - Sealant width: 6 to 25 mm. - Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater.

3.7 GROUTED AND SEALANT JOINTS

Grouted joints General: Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set. Clean out joints as necessary before grouting. Face grouting: Fill the joints solid and tool flush. Clean off surplus grout. Wash down when the grout has set. When grout is dry, polish the tiled surface with grout film remover and a clean cloth. Edges of tiles: Grout exposed edge joints. Epoxy grouted joints: Make sure tile edge surfaces are free of extraneous matter such as cement films or wax, before grouting. Mosaic tiles Grouting mosaics: If paper faced mosaics are to be bedded in cement mortar, pre-grout the sheeted mosaics from the back before fixing. After fixing, rub grout into the surface of the joints to fill any voids left from pre-grouting. Clean off surplus grout. When grout has set, wash down. If necessary, use a proprietary cement remover. Sealant joints General: Provide joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows: - Where tiling is cut around sanitary fixtures. - At internal corners of walls in showers. - Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts and nibs. - At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built-in cupboards. Material: Anti-fungal modified silicone. Width: 5 mm. Depth: Equal to the tile thickness.

3.8 COMPLETION

Spare tiles General: Supply spare matching tiles and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site. Quantity: At least 1% of the quantity installed. Cleaning General: Clean tiled surfaces using an appropriate tile cleaning agent, and polish. Operation and maintenance manuals General: Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the tiling, including procedures for maintaining the slip-resistance grading stating the expected life of the slip-resistance grade.

Page 85: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Partition System

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 85 of 140

PARTITION SYSTEM

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

Install a MS framed partition system complete with self closing hinged cubicle doors that is stable, secure and fit for purpose. This is a performance specification and the drawn details and construction description represent design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer the system to suit the design intent and to ensure fitness for purpose. All details and final arrangement are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to commencement of fabrication.

2 GENERAL

2.1 AIMS

Responsibilities General: Provide internal lining systems to the Selections.

2.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General General: Conform to the General requirements worksection.

2.3 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of wall framing before installation of linings.

2.4 TOLERANCES

General Flatness, twist, winding and bow: Maximum 1.5 mm deviation from a 1.5 mm straightedge placed in any position.

3 PRODUCTS

3.1 LIGHT STEEL FRAMES

Wall framing General: MS framing system of 50mm x 50mm SHS sections Sections and members: To AS/NZS 4600. Finish: Hot dip zinc coating to AS 1397.

3.2 LINING

Timber boards Refer to Timberwork section Adhesives General: Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose, and apply them so that they transmit the loads imposed, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.

Page 86: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Partition System

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 86 of 140

4 EXECUTION

4.1 PREPARATION

Slab General: Prepare the structural slab to receive the partitions. Set out General: Set out the fixing rods to conform to the partition layout. Set out partition layouts to conform to the documentation and to meet all required clear dimensions as noted in Access Consultants reports. Conform to tolerances as follows: - Misalignment (of adjoining surfaces at grid junctions): 1 mm maximum. - Deviation (from true grid lines and planes): 1:1000 up to 3 mm maximum.

4.2 DESCRIPTION

Cubicle partition system Install nominal vertical 20mm dia thread rods welded to MS base plates on to structural slab. These rods are set out to suit the MS partition layout. The finished topping screed is to be laid around these projecting rods as they will be concealed by the partition system. The length of the rods is set out to allow the MS partition framing to placed over the rods and secured via suitable bolted connection. The framing is set out with predrilled holes in the base rail under which a 40 dia skirting sleeve is located. This sleeve has been welded to the base of the partition frame and conceals the rod and sets out the 150mm height above finished screed level. Once the partition framing is installed onto the base fixing rods it can then be bolt fixed to the block wall using suitable secure mechanical fixings. Each Partition is finished with an inverted 75 mmx 50mm PFC at the head and this conceals an LED strip lighting system as per the Electrical Engineers documentation. All conduits are also to be concealed with power supply be chased into the block wall prior to tiling. The dividing partitions have a support SHS weld to the framed on each side. The hinge side allows secure fixing for the heavy duty hinges. The opposite side has a MS angles welded to the SHS to act as a strike. Refer to drawings for design intent. A 75mm x 50mm PFC acts as a head rail running the full length of the cubicle layout and this also conceals an equal concealed strip light system. The head rail is mechanically fixed to the partitions using suitable countersunk fixings. Where the cubicle finishes against a tiled bock wall the hinge side SHS frame has nom 90mmx 6mm fixing plate bolted to the block wall. The fixing plate runs the full height of the SHS support post and is fixed at set centres using suitable countersunk fixings. In the Male Amenities there is also an exposed end partition wall and it has a vertical 75mm x 50mm PFC as a leading edge. The PFC is to have a top and base plate welded in place off site and is to run the full height of the partition. Continuous MS lugs with dressed square edges act as trims for the face boarding. Once the partition frames and head sections are in place and secure the structural plywood substrate can be screwed and glued in place. The timber lining boards can then be glued and screwed to the substrate. Refer to Timberwork.

Page 87: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Partition System

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 87 of 140

Cubicle Doors The design intent requires a suitable exterior grade solid core door to be lined in timber boards to both sides and hung off the partition system using selected heavy duty stainless steel self closing hinges. 1.5 pairs are to be installed to each door and set out to provide maximum vandal resistance. Refer to Door Hardware schedule in the Appendix for general hardware. Hinges. It is proposed to use custom heavy duty and vandal resistant self closing stainless steel hinges on all toilet cubicle doors. These hinges are equal to those used by the City of Sydney on some of their amenity buildings. Refer to Appendix for fabrication information that is to be used for information only. The contractor is required to coordinate fabrication based on the actual design intent outlined with suitable fabricators.

4.3 LIGHT STEEL FRAMES

Stud framing General: Provide MS SHS framing to ensure design intent adherence that is fabricated off site Fit all required sub framing to support the plywood substrate. Jambs General: MS framing to provide adequate support for stainless steel self closing hinges.

4.4 TIMBER LINING

Refer to Timberwork

4.5 TRIMS

General General: Provide trim such as beads, mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining components, finishes and adjacent surfaces. Timber trim Hardwood: AS 2796.1.

4.6 COMPLETION

Protection General: Protect existing work from during the installation and make good any damage. Provide temporary coverings if necessary.

Page 88: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Termite Management

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 88 of 140

TERMITE MANAGEMENT

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide termite management materials and systems. Selections: As documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements.

1.3 STANDARD

General Termite barriers: To AS 3660.1.

1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the completed termite barriers.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Tests Requirement: Submit a Registered testing authority laboratory analysis certificate of chemical soil barrier type testing to Appendix E.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-SOIL MATRIX BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier Description: Composite membrane incorporating a termiticide. Product: Equal to Kordon Blockwork Description: Bedding mortar incorporating a termiticide. Application: Blockwork bed and perpends as follows: - Block walls built off a concrete slab on ground. - Buildings with typical raft infill (footing) or formed void slab construction. - Permanent barrier in sub-floor brickwork and brick piers. Assessment criteria Standard: To AS 3660.3.

Page 89: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Termite Management

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 89 of 140

3 EXECUTION

3.1 NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 4. Termite cap and strip shields Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 5. Woven stainless steel mesh barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 6. Graded stone particles barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 7.

3.2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS

General Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 8. Non-soil matrix barriers Installation: In conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 COMPLETION

Termite barrier notice General: Provide a durable notice permanently fixed in a prominent location to BCA B1.4(i)(ii) or BCA 3.1.3.2(b) and AS 3660.1 Appendix A. Waste materials Progressive cleaning: Make sure that no waste materials which could attract termites remain on the site. Warranty Warranty: Ten Years Completion inspection Report: At the end of the defects liability period, inspect the termite control systems and submit a report on their efficacy and status.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 SCHEDULE

Termite barriers schedule Barrier designation TB1 Location

Slab penetrations Equal to Kordon TB

Slab control joints and footing/slab joints Equal to Kordon TB

Under slabs Equal to Kordon

Building perimeters Equal to Kordon TB

Page 90: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Metal Finishes + Architectural Metalwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 90 of 140

METAL FINISHES + ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirements: Provide metal and prefinishes as documented. - Provide fabricated metal elements (MSE) that are equal to design intent shown in the drawings. - These elements are to be undamaged , plumb, level and straight - All visible surfaces are to be free of distortions or surface defects.

1.2 PRECEDENCE

General Worksections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this

worksection. - The requirements of this worksection override conflicting requirements of its referenced documents. - The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements.

1.3 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Structural documentation. - Steel and Hot Dip Galvanised - All Architectural Design Intent documentation

1.4 SUBMISSIONS

General: Submit samples of the following: - Anodising: Shop Drawings Shop drawings of all architectural metalwork elements showing but not limited to the following information:

• Details of fabrication and components • Details of fabrication involving other trades or compenents • Information necessary for site assembly • Proposals for the break up of large items

Installation of proprietary items General: Submit the manufacturers standard drawings and details showing: • Methods of construction • Assembly and fixing, with dimensions and tolerances.

Page 91: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Metal Finishes + Architectural Metalwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 91 of 140

Tests Stainless steel: Before fabrication commences, submit satisfactory evidence that relevant procedure test plates have passed the tests specified in AS/NZS 1554.6. Materials Manufacturer’s data: Submit manufacturer’s published product data including standard drawings and details.

1.5 ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTATION - DESIGN INTENT ONLY

This is a performance specification and the Contract drawings show generic design principles and design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

Coated steel Electrogalvanized (zinc) coating on ferrous hollow and open sections: To AS 4750. Metallic-coated: Steel coated with zinc or aluminium-zinc alloy as follows: - Ferrous open sections by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791. - Ferrous hollow sections by a continuous or specialised process: To AS/NZS 4792. - Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397. Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses. Steel wire: To AS/NZS 4534. Stainless steel Bars: To ASTM A276/A276M. Plate, sheet and strip: To ASTM A240/A240M. Welded pipe (plumbing applications): To AS 1769. Welded pipe (round, square, rectangular): To ASTM A554.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Metal separation Incompatible sheet metals: Provide separation by one of the following: - Apply an anti-corrosion low moisture transmission coating such as alkyd zinc phosphate primer or

aluminium pigmented bituminous paint to contact surfaces. - Insert a concealed separation layer such as polyethylene film, adhesive tape, or bituminous felt. Incompatible fixings: Do not use. Incompatible service pipes: Install lagging or grommets. Do not use absorbent, fibrous or paper products. Brazing General: Make sure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint. Butt joints: Do not use butt jointing for joints subject to load. If butt joints are used, do not rely on the filler metal fillet only. Filler metal: To AS/NZS 1167.1.

Page 92: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Metal Finishes + Architectural Metalwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 92 of 140

Finishing Visible joints: Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to the class of work (including grinding or buffing) before further treatment such as painting, galvanizing or electroplating. Make sure self-finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing. Preparation General: Before applying decorative or protective prefinishes to metal components, complete welding, cutting, drilling and other fabrication, and prepare the surface using a suitable method. Standard: To AS 1627 series. Priming steel surfaces: If site painting is documented to otherwise uncoated mild steel or similar surfaces, prime as follows: - After fabrication and before delivery to the works. - After installation, repair damaged priming and complete the coverage to unprimed surfaces to the

approval of the Superintendent’s representative. Welding Aluminium: To AS 1665. Stainless steel: To AS/NZS 1554.6. Steel: To AS/NZS 1554.1. Site Welding: No Site welding is permitted. Finishing Visible joints : Finish visible joints made by welding brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to the class of work( including grinding and buffing) before further treatment such as painting , galvanising or electroplating. Ensure self –finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing.

3.2 ELECTROPLATING

Electroplated coatings Chromium on metals: To AS 1192. - Service condition number: At least 2. Nickel on metals: To AS 1192. - Service condition number: At least 2. Zinc on iron or steel: To AS 1789.

3.3 ANODISING

General Standard: To AS 1231. Thickness grade: To AS 1231 Table H1. Application: To all perforated aluminium panels and all associated aluminium trim angles. Applicator: Sapphire Aluminium or equivalent Colour: Natural Satin Finish: 25 micron matt exterior grade Warranty: 7 years Sample General: Provide a sample on perforated sheet and 25 x 25 x trim angle - 300mm x 300mm for perforated sheet - 300mm length of aluminium angle

Page 93: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Metal Finishes + Architectural Metalwork

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 93 of 140

3.4 SHOP WELDING

General Quality: Provide finished welds that are free of surface and internal cracks, slag inclusion, and porosity. All welds are to be continuous fillet type that are to be ground flush to ensure a quality face finish.

3.5 COMPLETION

Damage Damaged prefinishes: Remove and replace items, including damage caused by unauthorised site cutting or drilling. Repair Metallic-coated sheet: If repair is required to metallic-coated sheet or electrogalvanizing on inline galvanized steel products, clean the affected area and apply a two-pack organic primer to AS/NZS 3750.9.

4 SELECTIONS

Refer to Appendix for Metalwork Schedule –M.

5 ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK - SIGNAGE

5.1 GENERAL - LETTERS

The architectural metalwork scope involves the fabrication of four (4) off individual Letters that identify the Male and Female Amenities. The letters are to be “M” and “W”. The letters are to be 30mm thick and 100mm deep and approximately 600mm high. They will be fabricated so as to neatly fit into the profile of the 250mm PFC at the apex of the ridge to both sides of the building. These are to be welded to the perimeter fascia via continuous welds that are then ground flush off site for a face finish. All welding is to be done off site. Please refer to drawings for clarification.

5.2 METHOD - LETTERS

The front face and rear face if the letters are cut out of 10mm MS plate using a plasma cutter. Edges are to be finished true and square. The depth of the letter is formed by a profiles 5mm ms sheet wrapped to form the depth of the letter. This wrap is neatly welded to the front and rear faces of the letter to produce a face finished square edge. The letter is then modified so it can be set into the PFC profile and welded into place as noted above. The letter and associated section of perimeter beam are then to be galvanised. The Letter will then be primed ready for a suitable exterior paint finish to be applied. The perimeter bean however remains as a galvanised. The font for the Letters is to be “Neutraface Condensed Light”

Page 94: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 94 of 140

DOORS, GATES + HATCH

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: - Provide doors, frames, doorsets, security screen doors as documented. - Provide custom steel framed timber slatted gates on ball bearing pivot hinges - Provide custom steel framed hatch with 20mm dia ms rod pull handle tiled to match exterior finish on fit for purpose heavy duty gas lifts.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Door hardware – refer to schedule in Appendix

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Balanced construction: A construction of flush doors in which the facings on one side of the core are

essentially equal in thickness, grain direction, properties and arrangement to those on the other side of the core. It is such that uniformly distributed changes in moisture content will not cause warpage.

- Door frame: Includes jamb linings. - Doorset: An assembly comprising a door or doors and supporting frame, guides and tracks including

the hardware and accessories necessary for operation. . Fire-doorset: A doorset which retains its integrity, provides insulation and limits, if required, the

transmittance of radiation in a fire. . Smoke-doorset: A doorset which restricts the passage of smoke.

- Flush door: A door leaf having two plane faces which entirely cover and conceal its structure. It includes doors with intermediate rail, cellular, blockboard and particleboard cores. . Solid core door: A flush door with a solid core continuous between stiles and rails or edge strips

and fully bonded to the faces. - Joinery door: A door leaf having either stiles and rails, or stiles, rails and muntins, framed together.

A joinery door may also incorporate glazing bars. . Louvred door: A joinery door in which the panel spaces are filled in with louvre blades. . Panelled door: A joinery door with spaces filled in with panels including glass.

1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Door frames in place before building in to masonry. - Door frames installed before fixing trim.

Page 95: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 95 of 140

1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Type tests General: Submit type-test certification complying with the following standards to verify conformance with the Doorsets performance schedule: - Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): To AS/NZS 1276.1, ISO 717-1 or AS/NZS ISO 717.1.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMES

Steel frames General: Continuously welded from metallic-coated steel sheet sections, including necessary accessories such as buffers, strike plates, spreaders, mortar guards, switch boxes, fixing ties or brackets, and cavity flashing with suitable provision for fixing hardware and electronic security assemblies, and prefinished with a protective coating. Finish: Grind the welds smooth, cold galvanize the welded joints and shop prime. Hardware and accessories: Provide for fixing hardware including hinges and closers, using 4 mm backplates and lugs. Screw fix the hinges into tapped holes in the back plates. Base metal thickness: - General: ≥ 1.1 mm. - Fire rated doorsets: ≥ 1.4 mm. - Security doorsets: ≥ 1.6 mm. Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397. - Coating class interior: Z275. - Coating class exterior: Z450. Steel door frames to be single rebate type and the All Access WC will require a Code complaint door closer.

2.2 DOORS

Standards Materials: To the following: - Decorative laminated sheets: To AS/NZS 2924.1. - Wet processed fibreboard (including hardboard): To AS/NZS 1859.4. - Dry processed fibreboard (including medium density fibreboard): To AS/NZS 1859.2. - Particleboard: To AS/NZS 1859.1 . - Plywood and blockboard for interior use: To AS/NZS 2270. - Plywood and blockboard for exterior use: To AS/NZS 2271. - Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810. - Timber – hardwood: To AS 2796.1. - Timber – softwood: To AS 4785.1. Certification General: Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product. Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works. General Doors: Proprietary products manufactured for interior or exterior applications and for the finish required. Flush doors General: Of balanced construction. Solid core: Solid flush doors as follows:

Page 96: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 96 of 140

- Flush door with blockboard: Core plate of timber strips laid edge to edge, fully bonded to each other and to facings each side of no less than two sheets of timber veneer.

- Single thickness of moisture resistant general-purpose medium density fibreboard. Smoke doors: Solid core 35 mm thick. Construction Adhesives: - Internal: To AS/NZS 2270. - External: To AS/NZS 2271. Partition doors Exterior Grade Solid core flush panel doors finished in timber cladding as noted in Partitions. External Security Pivoting gate Custom steel framed doors with timber slats on selected fit for purpose ball bearing pivot hardware. Refer to details. Tolerance Squareness: The difference between the lengths of diagonals of a door: ≤ 3 mm. Twist: The difference between perpendicular measurements taken from diagonal corners: ≤ 3 mm. Nominal size (mm): - Height: + 0, - 2. - Width: + 0, - 2. Access Control System Door D02 for both Type A and Type B buildings is required to have an access control system. This allows the doors to be locked at a set time. This will be by way of an access control system located in the Rangers Station for the Type B Building and in the Store Room for the Type A building. The locking will be way of a selected electronic strike system. Refer to Electrical Engineers documentation.

2.3 DOORSETS

Security screen doorsets Standard: To AS 5039. Arrangement: Conform to the Security screen doors construction schedule.

2.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

Face Trims Timber: Solid timber face rails screw fixed into doors using stainless steel screws that are concealed and then plugged.

Page 97: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 97 of 140

2.5 FINISH TO FLUSH PANEL DOORS D01,D02,D03

Generally The doors to the All Access WC , the Store room and the Rangers Station with be clad in a proprietary Patterned stainless steel cladding equal to Rimex Linen. The sheeting is as noted below: Rimex Cladding Base material: 304 grade stainless steel Colour: Natural satin Pattern: Linen Thickness: 1.2mm Location: External and internal faces of Doors D01, D02 and D03. This patterned stainless steel sheeting is to be installed where noted on the architectural drawings by a suitably experienced subcontractor. The subcontractor will install the sheeting as secretly fixed as facing to both sides of the nominated doors. The Contractor is to ensure that the panels that are delivered to site are stored to ensure that no damage occurs prior to installation. The cladding is to be protected with a suitable plastic sheeting or similar once installed to avoid damage by ongoing construction activity. Damaged panels must be removed and replaced at no cost to the Superintendent’s representative. The Superintendent must be given sufficient notice so a meeting can be arranged to discuss the cladding installation with the Architect in detail prior to any work commencing. This is to ensure a thorough understanding of the scope of work and the design intent. Install on exterior grade substrate that is fit for task.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FRAMES

General Frames: Install so that the frames are as follows: - Plumb, level, straight and true. - Fixed or anchored to the building structure. - Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening. Frame fixing Brackets: Metallic-coated steel: - Width: ≥ 25 mm. - Thickness: ≥ 1.5 mm. Depth of fixing for building into masonry: - Brackets: ≥ 200 mm. - Expansion anchors: ≥ 50 mm. - Plugs: ≥ 50 mm. - Rods: ≥ 60 mm. Heads of fasteners: Conceal where possible, otherwise sink the head below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish. Jamb fixing centres: ≤ 600 mm. Joints General: Make accurately fitted joints so that no fasteners, pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces. Steel frames Building in to masonry: Attach galvanized steel rods to jambs, build in and grout up. Fixing to masonry openings: Build in hairpin anchors and install locking bars, or use proprietary expansion anchors and screw twice through jambs at each fixing. Fixing to stud frame openings: Attach galvanized steel brackets to jambs and screw twice to studs at each fixing.

Page 98: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 98 of 140

normal structural movement of the building. Finishing Trim: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the door frames. Install to make neat and clean junctions between the frame and the adjoining building surfaces.

3.2 DOORS

Priming General: Prime timber door leaves on top and bottom edges before installation.

3.3 DOORSETS

Security screen doorsets Standard: To AS 5040.

3.4 COMPLETION

Operation General: Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces and that they are lubricated where appropriate. Protection Temporary coating: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces, remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection.

4 SELECTIONS

Refer to Architectural Drawings and Door Hardware schedule in Appendix G

5 GATES

This is a performance specification and the Contract drawings show generic design principles and design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing. Generally: There are two security gates per Amenities Building and their purpose is to lock off the Male and Female Amenities after hours. The Gates have a surround frame fabricated out of nom. 10mm thick MS flats and angles and have timber batten screen set into the frames. The timber screen is as noted in the Timberwork section. The gates are supported on an MS angle that houses a suitable ball bearing pivot mechanism that is selected to support the weight of the gate and allow continue and efficient action. The pivot mechanism selected should allow for the design intent shown in the documentation. The head pivot mechanism is support on a suitable gauge MS flat that is mechanically fixed to the MS wall angle adjacent. The design intent is for the gate to sit flush with the finished tiled wall when it is on the open position and to strike against a MS flat of minimum 12mm thickness that is welded to the external screen wall. The flat is to be checked around the head frame. Refer to drawing TD 252 for more information. These gates will be simply locked using a suitable pad lock system so the leading edge of the gat and the strike plate are to have holes predrilled to allow for locking to occur. Hole diameter to be conformed once pad lock system is selected.

Page 99: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Doors, Gates + Hatch

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 99 of 140

6 HATCH

This is a performance specification and the Contract drawings show generic design principles and design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing. Generally: The Rangers Station requires an opening in the external wall that allows interaction with the public. The access is provided by way of a flip up hatch on suitable heavy-duty gas lift stays. The hatch opening is trimmed in a custom nom. 60mmx 60mm x 10mm thick ms angle that acts as a dressed rebate to the opening. The hatch is top hinged by way of a suitable gauge 316 grade piano hinge that is fixed to the head trim angle. The hatch is fabricated out of 25mmx 25mm SHS sections that provides a suitable substrate for the glued and screwed 9mm cfc cladding to both internal and external faces. The external face is finished in ceramic tiles to match CT used on the exterior that are adhesive fixed to the cfc. The Internal face is clad in a patterned stainless steel secretly fixed cladding equal to Rimex – Linen. See information above. The edges of the hatch are trimmed in 3mm MS flats that align with the finish of both internal and external faces. The base of the hatch has a projecting 20mm dia MS bar welded to the surround and this is the pull handle that lifts the hatch. The contractor is to ensure that the hatch design is stable and secure and that the stays are adequate to the task of allowing operation and to keep the hatch in a safe opening position. The head height under the open hatch must be such that it allows safe movement under. The hatch when in place must be weather tight therefore all required weather seals equal to Raven should be installed as required. Allow to supply a suitable surface mounted lockable bolt to hatch to both sides of hatch.

Page 100: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 100 of 140

BUILDING ACCESS SAFETY SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide the building access safety system, as documented. Performance Roofing and cladding: Maintain the waterproofing integrity without damage or distortion. Maintain the structural integrity of the supporting elements.

1.2 DESIGN

General The system is to be equal to “Sayfa” or equivalent. Requirements Performance requirements: To AS/NZS 1891.2 Section 4. Access: Provide a system for 1 workers at any one time, to access the following: - Full extent of gutters. - Roof areas within 2.5 m of fall hazards not otherwise protected by parapets or guard rails. Documentation Refer to architectural roof plans for proposed anchors and ladder brackets.

1.3 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements.

1.4 STANDARDS

General Industrial fall-arrest system: To AS/NZS 1891.1, AS/NZS 1891.2, AS/NZS 1891.3 and AS/NZS 1891.4. Industrial rope access system: To AS/NZS 4488.1 and AS/NZS 4488.2.

1.5 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS/NZS 1891.1 and AS/NZS 5532 apply.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Certification General: Submit certification of installed system. Documentation Instruction manual General: Submit the manufacturer’s instruction manuals.

Page 101: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 101 of 140

Samples One x fall arrest anchor One x ladder support bracket . Warranties Requirement: Submit the manufacturer’s published product warranties.

1.7 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Shop fabricated or assembled items ready for delivery to the site. - Commencement of shop or site welding. - All equipment attachments with concealed fixings, before they are covered. - Site erected assemblies on completion of erection, before applying finishes. - Steel surfaces prepared for, and immediately before, site applied finishes. Installation inspector: Registered height safety inspector or engineer.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MARKING

Identification General: Deliver fall protection assembly to the site in the manufacturer’s original sealed packaging legibly marked to show the following: - Manufacturer’s identification. - Installer’s contact details. - Intended location. - Load rating and direction. - Current inspection/service date. - Batch number or serial number of the components.

2.2 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

Access safety system System: Sayfa System or equivalent Anchors Single point anchors: To AS/NZS 5532. Fall arrest anchor equal to Safa “3 Sixty” unit Ladder Support Bracket Ladder sup[ort bracket equal to “Katt” type. Support plat foxed to rood is to be stainless and bracket is to be natural zinclume. It must NOT be coloured. Coloured brackest will be rejected. Warranties General: For each type of building access safety system submit the manufacturer’s warranty.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND TESTING

General Drilled-in anchors: Load test drilled-in anchors used in shear and not in axial tension (direct pull-out) before use.

Page 102: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 102 of 140

Standards Industrial fall arrest systems: To AS/NZS 1891.2. Industrial rope access systems: to AS/NZS 4488.1. Contractor Installer: Registered Installer, approved by the manufacturer. Labels and signage General: To AS/NZS 1891.4 clause 2.2.9. Proof load test for anchors Standard: To AS/NZS 4488.2 clause 5.3. Proof load test for horizontal lifeline and rail systems Standard: To AS/NZS 1891.3 clause 3.1.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

General Preventative and mandatory system maintenance: By an Accredited Height Safety Inspector/Certifier, in conformance with AS/NZS 1891.4 Section 9 and manufacturer's maintenance/recertification recommendations. Checklist for all inspections: To AS/NZS 1891.2 Supp 1 Table 8, and AS/NZS 1891.4 Section 9 and Appendices C and D. The installer/competent person: To AS/NZS 1891.2 clause 1.2.1. Periodic inspections Standard: To AS/NZS 1891.2 clause 9.2. Completion certificate: - Provide inspection, testing and certification by an Accredited Installer and/or Accredited Height

Safety Inspector: . Upon completion of the installation at the date for practical completion. . Upon the expiry of the defects liability period or 12 months after completion of the installation

whichever is the lesser, and valid for a further 12 months period. - Record the date of the next system inspection and period of validity and display the certificate at the

access points of the work area or on the individual system components where provision is made. Inspection after a fall or other event Standard: To AS/NZS 1891.2 Supp 1 clause 9.3. Proof testing of drilled-in anchorages Standard: To AS/NZS 1891.2 Supp 1 clause 9.4. On-going maintenance Certificate: Submit the completion certificates and notify the proprietor of the requirement for continued interval testing.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

General Sayfa System or equivalent

Page 103: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Thermal Insulation

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 103 of 140

THERMAL INSULATION

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide thermal insulation as documented. Performance Requirements: - Complete for their function. - Conforming to the detail and location drawings. - Firmly fixed in position. -

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - 0171 General requirements.

1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - FBS-1 (fibre-bio-soluble) mineral wool: Insulation composed of bio-soluble glass or rock fibres. - Fibre batts: Flexible insulation supplied as factory cut pieces and composed of mineral wool (glass

and rock fibre) or polyester fibre. - Fire hazard properties: Terminology to BCA A2.4. - Pliable building membrane: To AS/NZS 4200.1 and equivalent to sarking-type materials, as defined

in the BCA. - Thermal insulation terminology: To AS/NZS 4859.1. - Vapour permeable (breathable) membrane: A flexible membrane material, normally used for

secondary waterproofing that allows for the transmission of water vapour.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Certification Requirement: Submit evidence of conformance to INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANE, Insulation. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Fire hazard properties General: Submit evidence of conformance to INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANE MATERIALS, Fire hazard properties. Materials Thermal insulation properties: Submit evidence of conformance to AS/NZS 4859.1. Warranties Manufacturer's published product warranties: Submit on completion.

Page 104: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 104 of 140

1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the pliable membrane and insulation before they are covered up or concealed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MARKING

Identification General: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer’s original sealed packaging, legibly marked to show the following: - Manufacturer’s identification. - Product brand name. - Product type. - Quantity. - Product reference code and batch number. - Date of manufacture. - Material composition and characteristics such as volatility, flash point, light fastness, colour and

pattern. Provide technical data sheets if not shown on labels. - Handling and installation instructions. - Safety data sheets. -

2.2 INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANE MATERIALS

Fire hazard properties Insulation: Fire hazard indices for all materials when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3: - Spread-of-Flame Index: ≤ 9. - Smoke-Developed Index: ≤ 8 if Spread-of-Flame Index > 5. - Materials with reflective facing: Test to AS/NZS 1530.3 and the recommendations of Appendix A6. Pliable membranes: - Flammability Index when tested to AS 1530.2: ≤ 5. Insulation Cellulosic fibre (loose fill): To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 5. Mineral wool blankets and cut pieces: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 8. Polyester: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 7. Polyisocyanurate (rigid cellular RC/PIR): To AS 1366.2. Polystyrene (extruded rigid cellular RC/PS-E): To AS 1366.4. Polystyrene (moulded rigid cellular RC/PS-M): To AS 1366.3. Polyurethane (rigid cellular RC/PUR): To AS 1366.1. Polyurethane (sprayed): To AS 1366.1 Table 2. Wet processed fibreboard (including softboard): To AS/NZS 1859.4. Wool: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 6. Reflective thermal insulation: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 9. Pliable membranes Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.1. Vapour barrier: - Vapour barrier classification: High. Sarking membrane (other than walls and gables): - Water barrier classification: High.

Page 105: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 105 of 140

Vapour permeable (breathable) membrane: Fasteners and supports General: Metallic-coated steel. Mesh support to roof insulation Metallic-coated steel wire netting: To AS 2423 Section 4. - Size: 45 mm mesh x 1 mm diameter. Welded safety mesh: To AS/NZS 4389.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Bulk insulation Installation: To AS 3999 and BCA J1.2. General: Firmly butt together fibre blankets or batts, with no gaps except as follows: - Access openings and vents: Do not obstruct. - Light fittings: To AS/NZS 3000 clause 4.5. - Electrical cables: To AS 3999 clause 2.6. Glass Wool and Rock Wool insulation: Conform to the ICANZ Industry Code of Practice for safe use of Glass Wool and Rock Wool insulation. Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS-1 BIO-SOLUBLE INSULATION. Pliable membrane Installation: To AS/NZS 4200.2 and BCA J1.2 or BCA 3.12.1.1, as appropriate.

3.2 ROOF INSULATION

General Location: The whole of the roof area including skylight shaft walls, except the following: - Eaves, overhangs, skylights, vents and openings. - Roofs to outbuildings, garages, and semi-enclosed spaces such as verandahs, porches and

carports. Mesh support to roof insulation Locations: Provide support to the following: - Sarking, vapour barrier or reflective thermal insulation membranes laid over roof framing members

which are spaced at more than 900 mm centres. - Blanket type thermal insulation laid over roof framing members as sound insulation to metal roofing. Wire safety mesh: Lay over the roof framing allowing only natural mesh sag between members to suit the application. Staple to timber frame, wire to steel frame. Installing welded safety mesh: To AS/NZS 4389. Pliable membranes Sarking membrane: - Location: Provide sarking under tile and shingle roofing. Vapour barrier: - Installation: Lay over the roof framing with sufficient sag to allow the bulk insulation to achieve its full

thickness. Overlap all edges 150 mm and seal all joints with pressure sensitive adhesive tape. Metal roofs – bulk insulation Product: Fibre blankets or batts. Installation: - Batts: Fit tightly between framing members.

Page 106: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Building Access Safety Systems

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 106 of 140

- Blanket for sound insulation: Install over the roof framing, reflective thermal insulation (if any), and mesh support, so that the blanket is in continuous contact with the underside of the metal roofing sheets.

- Combined blanket and reflective insulation: Lay facing reflective insulation face downwards over safety mesh.

Ceiling insulation – bulk insulation Product type: - Framed ceilings: Fibre batts. - Suspended ceiling: Fibre blanket. Application: Over ceiling lining. Installation: - Batts: Fit tightly between framing members. - Blankets: Butt joint and lay over ceiling panels or lining.

3.3 COMPLETION

Warranties Insulation and pliable membranes: Submit the manufacturer’s published product warranties.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 INSULATION

Roof insulation Property A B C Application Under metal deck

roofing

Type/Product Batts equal to Bradford Heavy Duty Anticon

Location Rangers Station

Thickness (mm) 100mm

Page 107: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 107 of 140

ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide the electrical systems summarised as follows and as outlined in Electrical Engineers Documentation. If any information in the Electrical Engineers Documentation contradicts the information below then this takes precedents. A/C in Rangers Station- Type B Building Make all electrical provision for a 2.5 KW split system reverse cycle AC system equal to Panasonic. The condenser is remotely located in the storeroom. Access Control to Door D02 This door in both buildings has an electronic strike linked to a suitable access control system. Qualification General: Use only an appropriately experienced and qualified designer to undertake the electrical design work on the systems documented. Performance General: Carry out verification tests and measurements to show compliance with the documentation.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - Service trenching. - Electrical Engineers Documentation - Appendix A – General Requirements + EMP

1.3 STANDARDS

General General: To AS/NZS 3000 Part 2 unless otherwise documented. Electrical systems: To AS/NZS 3008.1.1 and SAA HB 301. Degrees of protection (IP code): To AS 60529. EMC: To AS/NZS 61000.

1.4 EXECUTION

General Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with adjacent building elements. Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements. Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly. Allow for movement in both structure and services. Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the manufacturer. Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors > 150 mm clear of the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access.

Page 108: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 108 of 140

Submissions Samples: Provide samples of all accessories and luminaires. Technical data: Submit documentation to fully describe the proposed installation. Installation of accessories General: Install accessories and conceal cabling in walls in conformance with the following: Face masonry partition: Flush wall box with conduit chased into wall. Core Filled block walls: Vertically mounted flush wall box with conduit concealed in cut blocks. Location: Confirm the final location of all outlets and equipment on site before installation. Spacing from adjacent horizontal surface: ≥ 75 mm to the centre of accessory socket. Default mounting heights to centre of accessory plate: - Outlets: as documented - Switches and controls: as documented. Flush mounting: Provide flush mounted accessories except in plant rooms. Common face plates: Mount adjacent flush mounted accessories under a common faceplate. Restricted location: Do not install wall boxes across junctions of wall finishes. Surface mounting: Proprietary mounting blocks. Installation of ceiling mounted appliances Connections - Appliances: Provide flush mounted outlets on the ceiling next to support brackets. Connections - Fixed equipment: Provide concealed permanent connections. Mounting: Mount appliances independent of ceiling tiles and suspended ceiling material. Fixing: For equipment and appliances heavier than 30 kg provide support through the suspended ceiling to the building structure. Brace appliances that have excessive bending moments, are heavy or vibrate, to prevent horizontal movement. Manuals General: Conform to the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS clause in the General requirements worksection. Certification General: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements and capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission.

1.5 MARKING AND LABELLING

General General: Provide labels including control and circuit equipment ratings, functional units, notices for operational and maintenance personnel, incoming and outgoing circuit rating, sizes and origin of supply and kW ratings of motor starters. Identifying labels General: Provide labels fixed to access panels, doors, covers and escutcheon panels and internal equipment, indicating the relevant worksection and component. Single-line diagrams Custom-built assemblies: Provide single-line diagrams. Format: Non-fading print, at least A3 size, showing the situation as installed. Mounting: Enclose in a non-reflective PVC frame and wall mount close to assembly. Marking cables General: Identify the origin of all wiring by means of legible indelible marking. Identification labels: Provide durable labels fitted to each core and sheath, permanently marked with numbers, letters or both to suit the connection diagrams. Multicore cables and trefoil groups: Identify at each end with durable non-ferrous tags clipped around each cable or trefoil group.

Page 109: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 109 of 140

Location marking General: Accurately mark the location of underground cables with route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base. Location: Place markers at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m. Concrete bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum. Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate. Indicate distance to the next marker. Plates: Brass, aluminium or mild steel hot-dipped galvanized minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick. Plate fixing: Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws. Marker height: Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces, and 25 mm above other surfaces. Marker tape for electrical services: Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground wiring, provide a 150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words WARNING – electric cable buried below, laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level. Labelling – minimum lettering heights Main assembly designation: 25 mm. Distribution assembly designations: 15 mm. Small proprietary distribution boards: 10 mm. Main switches: 10 mm. Outgoing functional units: 8 mm. Identifying labels (on outside of cabinet rear covers): 4 mm. Danger, warning and caution notices: 10 mm for main heading, 5 mm for remainder. Other labels including equipment labels within cabinets: 3 mm. Label colours Generally: Black lettering on white background except as follows: - Main switch and caution labels: Red lettering on white background. - Danger, warning labels: White lettering on red background. Fixing General: Fix labels securely. Fixing methods: Use screws and double-sided adhesive. Fixed in extruded aluminium sections attached to panels with rivets or countersunk screws. Aluminium labels: Aluminium or monel rivets. Restrictions: Do not use self-tapping or thread-cutting screws. Permanent fixing: Fix labels permanently in place. Label fixing table Component Fixing scheme Type Cables Origin and destination Self adhesive – wrap on Cross connects Port number Proprietary Outlets SAA HB 29 Figs 5-18 Engraved plate Wall boxes SAA HB 29 Figs 5-18 Engraved adhesive label Patch cords Type of service Colour code

1.6 WIRING SYSTEMS

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3013. Selection: Provide wiring systems appropriate to the installation conditions and the function of the load.

Page 110: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 110 of 140

1.7 POWER CABLES

Cable General: Copper cable generally, multi-stranded except for MIMS. Minimum size: Conform to the following: - Lighting subcircuits: 1.5 mm2. - Power subcircuits: 2.5 mm2. - Submains: 6 mm2. Voltage drop: Install final subcircuit cables within the voltage drop parameters dictated by the route length and load. Fault loop impedance: Provide final subcircuit cables selected to satisfy the requirements for automatic disconnection under short-circuit and earth fault/touch voltage conditions.

1.8 ACCESSORIES

General: Provide the following and as documented: - General power outlets. - Isolating switches. - Three phase outlets. -

1.9 COMPLETION TESTS

Dummy load tests General: If electrical tests are required and the actual load is not available, provide a dummy load equal to at least 75% of the design load.

2 SWITCHBOARD

2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide connection to existing remote switchboard in line with General Requirements and EMP. Rated short-circuit currents: Design for the maximum prospective symmetrical r.m.s. current values at rated operational voltage, at each assembly incoming supply terminal, excluding effects of current limiting devices.

2.2 STANDARDS

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3439.1 and AS/NZS 3439.3. Statutory authority’s equipment General: Refer to network distributor service rules to determine their requirements. Install equipment supplied by the network distributor, and provide wiring to complete the installation. Rated short-circuit currents General: The rated fault capacity of the assembly enclosure, busbars and outgoing protective devices is equal to the fault level of the system at the assembly. Busbars General: Incorporate proprietary insulated busbar systems for the interconnection of isolators, circuit breakers and other circuit protective devices. Earthing General: Make provision for connection of communications systems CET at switchboard earth bar to AS/ACIF S009. IP rating General: IP52 minimum.

Page 111: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 111 of 140

Weatherproof: IP56 minimum. Finishes Interior: White. Exterior: Manufacturers standard finish. Supporting structure Assemblies: Conform to the following: - Wall mounted: ≤ 2 m2. - Floor mounted: Assemblies > 2 m2. Ventilation General: Required to maintain design operating temperatures at full load.

3 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS

3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Connect to existing remote switchboard in line with Electrical Engineers documentation.

3.2 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Integral type: Incorporate earth leakage in circuit breaker protection operation to AS/NZS 61009.1. Maximum tripping current: 30 mA.

3.3 FUSES WITH ENCLOSED FUSE LINKS

General Standards: To AS 60269.1, AS 60269.2.0 and AS 60269.2.1. Fault level: Provide fuses suitable for the fault level at the assembly, and which discriminate with other protective equipment. Let-through energy and peak cut-off current: To suit protected equipment. Utilisation category: Distribution/general purpose: gG. Fuse-holders: Mount fuse-holders so that fuse carriers may be withdrawn directly towards the operator and away from live parts. Provide fixed insulation which shrouds live metal when the fuse carrier is withdrawn. Barriers: Provide barriers on both sides of each fuse link, preventing inadvertent electrical contact between phases by the insertion of screwdriver. Fuse links: Enclosed, high rupturing capacity type mounted in a fuse carrier. If necessary for safe removal and insertion of the fuse carrier, provide extraction handles. Mount on clips within the spares cabinet. Identification: Clearly indicate Australian manufacturer or distributor.

3.4 CONTACTORS

Standard: To AS 60947.4.1. Rated operational current: The greater of: - Full load current of the load controlled. - 16 A. Contacts life: 1 million operations at AC-3 or DC-3. Mounting: Mount with sufficient clearance to allow full access for maintenance, removal and replacement of coils and contacts, without the need to disconnect wiring or remove other equipment.

Page 112: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 112 of 140

Auxiliary contacts: Provide auxiliary contacts with at least one normally-open and one normally-closed separate contacts with rating of 6 A at 230 V a.c. Interconnection: Do not connect contactors in series or parallel to achieve ratings.

4 LIGHTING

4.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete operational lighting system, tested and commissioned.

4.2 STANDARDS

Standards Interior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1680.0, AS/NZS 1680.1, AS/NZS 1680.2.1,AS/NZS 1680.2.2, AS/NZS 1680.2.3, AS/NZS 1680.2.4,AS/NZS 1680.2.5 and AS 1680.3 Exterior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1158.0, AS/NZS 1158.1.1, AS/NZS 1158.1.2, AS/NZS 1158.2, AS/NZS 1158.3.1 and AS/NZS 1158.4. Proprietary equipment: Provide only proprietary luminaires, fittings and accessories. Modifications and refurbishing: Carry out to the original manufacturer’s standards. Minimum energy performance standards (MEPS) General: To AS/NZS 4783.2 and AS/NZS 4782.2. Self-ballasted lamps: To AS/NZS 4847.2.

4.3 LAMPS

General Lamps: Provide all luminaires complete with lamps and accessories. Verify operation: Install lamps in all luminaries and verify correct operation Low voltage lamps: Provide lamps strictly in conformance with the luminaire manufacturer’s recommendation. Dichroic lamps: Provide dichroic lamps with integral reflector. Standards Fluorescent: To AS/NZS 4782.1. Tungsten halogen: To IEC 60357.

4.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

General: Provide the following as documented: - Lighting switches. - Automatic control systems. Documentation: Provide complete technical and operational documentation for the lighting control system.

4.5 INSTALLATION

General Supports: Mount luminaires on proprietary supports by means of battens, trims, noggings, roses or packing material to suit location. Recessed luminaires support: To AS 2946.

Page 113: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Electrical Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 113 of 140

4.6 COMPLETION

General Requirement: Before the date of practical completion, carry out the following: - Verify the operation of all luminaires. - Replace lamps which have been in service at practical completion for a period greater than 50% of

the lamp life as published by the lamp manufacturer.

5 SELECTIONS

Refer to Electrical Engineers Documentation and RCP drawing.

Page 114: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 114 of 140

HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide the hydraulic services as shown on documents and as per Hydraulic Engineers Documentation. If any information in the Hydraulic Engineers Documentation contradicts the information below then this takes precedents. Authority submissions: Make submissions (including notices) to authorities relating to the works. Selections: As documented. Qualification: Use only appropriately experienced and qualified persons to undertake hydraulic design work. If requested, provide documents verifying the qualification and experience.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Service trenching. - Roofing – combined for roof plumbing. - Hydraulic Engineers Documentation - EMP

1.3 STANDARDS

General Plumbing and drainage: To AS/NZS 3500.0, AS/NZS 3500.1, AS/NZS 3500.2, AS/NZS 3500.3, AS/NZS 3500.4 and the Plumbing Code of Australia (PCA). Authorised products: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Copper pipe and fittings-installation and commissioning: To AS 4809. Gas: To AS/NZS 5601.1. Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Network Utility Operator: A person who undertakes the piped distribution of drinking water or natural

gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system. - Hot-dip galvanized: Zinc coated to AS/NZS 4680 after fabrication with coating thickness and mass

to AS/NZS 4680 Table 1.

Page 115: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 115 of 140

2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

2.1 DESIGN

Extent Requirement: Provide additional design work necessary to complete the documented hydraulic services.

2.2 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services.

2.3 SUBMISSIONS

Drawings Standard: To AS 1100.101, AS 1100.201, AS 1100.301, AS 1100.401 and AS/NZS 1100.501 as applicable. Requirement: Submit detail drawings at minimum 1:100 scale, showing the following: - Pipework and equipment layout and sections showing the work to be installed on the level that the

services are installed. Do not submit glass floor drawings. - Long sections of below ground drainage. - Riser layouts and sections. - Piping and other schematic drawings including numbering of each valve to correspond to valve tags

notation. - Inclusions: Include the following on the drawings: . Access openings, cover plates, valve boxes and access pits. . Details of control panels including control and power diagrams. . Insulation of piping, fittings and tanks. . Location, capacity, type and other relevant details of water heaters, including supports and safe

trays. . Location, type, grade and finish of piping, fittings, valves, meters and pipe supports. . On-site detention pondage areas. . Provision of a temporary fire hydrant service in the construction period. . Provision of blue metal back fill to seepage drain system. . Provision of erosion control measures. . Provision of road barriers and lighting. . Provision of site treatment and fire vehicle parking as required adjacent to the fire hydrant booster

inlet valve station. . Provision of temporary sanitary accommodation for construction workers. . Provision of trafficable cover plates in the public domain. . Relevant survey levels. . Site and floor set out points. . Tank stands and supporting structures.

Technical data Certification: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets the requirements and capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission. Submissions: Submit technical data for all items of plant and equipment.

Page 116: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 116 of 140

2.4 INSTALLATION

Accessories General: Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the systems, including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and pumps. Isolating valves: In addition to valves required to meet statutory requirements, provide valves so that isolation of parts of the system for safe isolation of the system in the event of leaks or maintenance causes a minimum of inconvenience to building occupants. Connections to Network Utility Operator mains General: Excavate to locate and expose the connection points and connect to the Network Utility Operator mains. On completion, backfill and compact the excavation and reinstate surfaces and elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.

2.5 PAINTING, FINISHES MARKING

Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192

service condition 2, bright. - Externally and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):

Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings.

- Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping.

3 SANITARY FIXTURES

3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide sanitary fixtures. Selections: As documented. Refer to Appendix Schedule C01- Fittings + Fixtures

3.2 STANDARDS

Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Standards Sanitary fixtures: To ATS 5200. Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

4 TAPWARE

4.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide tapware. Selections: As documented. Refer to Appendix Schedule C01- Fittings + Fixtures

Page 117: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 117 of 140

4.2 STANDARDS

Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Standards Tapware: To ATS 5200. Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

5 STORMWATER – BUILDINGS

5.1 GENERAL

General General: Provide stormwater installation. Selections: As documented.

5.2 STORMWATER DRAINS

Location General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage pits to the outlet point or point of connection. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 50 mm (nominal) above finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains. All downpipes are to be concealed within CHS posts with no pipework, bends or connections to be visible. Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. Pipe underlay General: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, at least 75 mm thick after compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on the trench bottom or underlay. Pipe surrounds General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers ≤ 200 mm loose thickness, and compact without damaging or displacing the piping. Anchor blocks General: If necessary to restrain lateral and axial movement of the stormwater pipes provide reinforced concrete anchor blocks at junctions and changes of grade or direction. Thermal movement General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility is not sufficient to absorb movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections.

Page 118: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 118 of 140

5.3 SUBSOIL DRAINS

General Refer to Northrop Documentation.

5.4 TESTING

Pre-completion tests General: Before backfilling or concealing, carry out the following tests: - Downpipes within buildings: Air or water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 10. - Site stormwater drains and main internal drains: Air or water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3

Section 10. - Rising mains from pumped discharge: Water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 10. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test.

5.5 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: Clean and flush the whole installation.

6 WASTEWATER

6.1 GENERAL

General General: Provide sanitary plumbing and drainage. Selections: As documented. Refer to Appendix C Schedule C01- Fittings + Fixtures Location General: Verify location and invert of piping before commencing installation. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Ducts: If installed in ducts, locate and fix stacks, wastes and pipes independently of other services. Arrange so they are easily accessible and removable throughout their entire length. Discharge from air handling systems Trays, sumps and plumbing: To AS/NZS 3666.1. Thermal movement General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility is not sufficient to absorb movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections. Vent pipes Refer to Architectural and Hydraulic Engineers details. Pipe is attached to existing post in Childrens play area. Wet area floors General: Where drainage connections pass through wet area floors, terminate 4 mm below the substrate surface.

6.2 SANITARY DRAINAGE

Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter.

Page 119: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 119 of 140

6.3 PIPING

Finishes General: All pipework is to be concealed within CHS posts, custom stainless steel basin or behind stainless steel access panels. In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings. Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping.

6.4 TESTS

Pre-completions tests Before backfilling or concealing: Test to AS/NZS 3500.2 Section 13. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test.

6.5 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: On completion clean and flush the whole installation.

7 COLD HEATED WATER

7.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide cold water. Selections: As documented.

7.2 PRODUCTS

Backflow prevention devices Standard: To AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2. and vent pipes. Water meters Standard: To the AS 3565.1 and AS 3565.4. Installation: To the requirements of the Network Utility Operator.

7.3 PIPING

Location Mains connection: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main through a stop valve and meter. Cold water system: Provide the cold water supply system, installed from the meter to the draw-off points or connections to other services. Finishes General: All pipework must be concealed Finish exposed piping, including fittings, cover plates and supports, as follows: - Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright in internal locations such as toilet

and kitchen areas: - Paint external above ground piping, and internal steel piping and iron fittings exposed to view. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):

Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings.

Page 120: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 120 of 140

- Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. Fittings and accessories General: Provide the fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the water supply system, including taps, valves, backflow prevention devices, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and automatic controls and alarms. Provision for dismantling: Arrange piping by the provision of unions or similar so that valves, taps and other maintainable components can be removed for maintenance without disturbing or cutting adjacent piping. Pipes under pressure embedded in concrete General: Use only copper pipe and the minimum number of joints. Pressure test and rectify leaks before the concrete is poured.

7.4 TESTING

Pre-completion tests Pressure tests: Before insulation is applied to joints pressure test piping to AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS/NZS 3500.4 as appropriate. If leaks are found, rectify and re-test. Cross connections: Isolate systems individually and check for cross connections. Backflow prevention: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Tapware: Check for leaks. Completion test General: Provide a full operational test to verify compliance with documented requirements.

7.5 COMPLETION

Commissioning Strainers: Remove, clean and replace strainer baskets. Cleaning: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix H. Disinfection: Disinfect to AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix I. Cold water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.1 Section 16. Testable backflow prevention devices: Test and commission to AS 2845.3 by a licensed plumber with backflow device accreditation. Tag and certify to the requirements of the Network Utility Operator. Charging Completion: On completion of installation, commissioning, testing and disinfection, fill the system with water, turn on control and isolating valves and the energy supply and leave the water supply system in full operational condition. Maintenance Heated water systems: To AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 12 and AS/NZS 3666.2. Maintenance manuals: To AS/NZS 3666.2.

8 SELECTIONS

8.1 SUBMISSIONS

Samples schedule Sample required Details and inclusions All items noted in Schedule C01- Fittings + Fixtures

Page 121: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Hydraulic Design and Install

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 121 of 140

8.2 COMPONENTS

Sanitary fixtures schedule Refer to Appendix – Schedule C01- Fittings + Fixtures

Page 122: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Sanitary Fixtures

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 122 of 140

SANITARY FIXTURES

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide sanitary fixtures. Selections: As documented. Ensure compliance

1.2 STANDARDS

Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Standards Sanitary fixtures: To ATS 5200. Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

2 SELECTIONS

2.1 SANITARY FIXTURES

Refer to Appendix C Schedule B- Fittings + Fixtures

Page 123: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Tensile Security Mesh System

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 123 of 140

TENSILE SECURITY MESH SYSTEM

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: - Provide a tensile mesh system to be installed using appropriate proprietary hardware to form a security barrier between the top of the wall and the underside of the undulating roof. The selected mesh is fixed to ms angles at the base and to PFC members over.

1.2 PRODUCT

Tensile security mesh is equal to Ronstan X-Tend stainless steel security screen consisting of - Ronstan ACS2-SSM05 perimeter cables - Carl Stahl M10 ss collared eyebolts around the perimeter mesh - Carl Stahl X-Tend mesh infill – 1.5mm gauge + ss ferrules. 80mm aperture (horizontal

orientation)

1.3 INSTALLATION

This is to be supplied and installed by an experienced mesh installers. An appropriate installer is Ronstan International Pty Ltd. Contact Rafael Katigbak Mob: 0420 980 693

Page 124: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Louvre Windows

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 124 of 140

LOUVRE WINDOWS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

General Requirement: Provide louvre windows, as documented. These are to be set into custom MS projecting window boxes as indicated on the architectural drawings.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - General requirements. - Metalwork Schedule - Metalwork

1.3 STANDARDS

General Selection and installation: To AS 2047. Glazing Glass type and thickness: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is given. Materials and installation: To AS 1288. Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667. Terminology for work on glass: To AS/NZS 4668.

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - AWA: Australian Window Association. - WERS: Window Energy Rating Scheme. Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection, the following definitions apply: - Louvres - horizontal: Louvres that span between frame mullions or centre mullions. - Total system SHGC: Solar heat gain coefficient as defined by BCA and tested in conformance with

NFRC 200. - Total system U-Value: Thermal transmittance as defined by BCA and tested in conformance with

NFRC 100.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Certification Conformance: Submit evidence that window assemblies meet documented design wind pressures and water penetration resistance. Maintenance manuals General: Submit the louvre window manufacturer’s published instructions for operation, care and maintenance.

Page 125: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Louvre Windows

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 125 of 140

Samples General: Submit samples of louvre window system components as follows: - Accessory and hardware items not selected as proprietary items including louvre holders and

operators, locks, latches, handles, catches, anchor brackets and attachments, masonry anchors and weather seals (pile or extruded).

- Colour samples of prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated extrusions and sheet) showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected colour.

- Frame member profiles and louvre materials. - Frame member joining techniques. - Label each sample, giving the Series code reference and date of manufacture. Glazing: Submit samples of glazing materials, each at least 200 x 200 mm, showing specified visual properties and the range of variation, if any, for each of the following types of glass: - Tinted or coloured glass. - Patterned or obscured glass or glazing plastics. Shop drawings General: Submit shop drawings to a scale that best describes the detail, showing the following: - Frame member profiles. - Hardware, fittings and accessories including fixing details. - Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. - Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly. - Lubrication requirements. - Methods of assembly. - Methods of installation including fixing, joint sealing and flashing. - Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion. Certification: Submit an engineer's certificate verifying conformance to AS 2047. Subcontractors General: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers. Tests Type tests: Submit reports verifying conformance to AS 2047 and the performance requirements as documented in the Louvre window performance schedule. Warranties Requirement: Standard Industry warranty

1.6 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Openings prepared to receive windows (if windows are to be installed in prepared openings). - Fabricated window assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site. - Fabricated window assemblies delivered to the site, before installation. - Commencement of window installation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Standards Flashings: To AS/NZS 2904. Aluminium extrusions: To AS/NZS 1866.

Page 126: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Louvre Windows

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 126 of 140

2.2 GLASS

Glass and glazing materials Glass: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use. Glazing plastics: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact resistance, and general deterioration. Safety glasses Standard: To AS/NZS 2208. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ).

2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS

General Glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the conditions of application and the required performance. Jointing materials Compatibility: Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non-staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces. Pile weather strips Standard: To AAMA 701/702. Materials: Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing, low friction silicone treated, ultra violet stabilised. Finned type: A pile weather seal with a central polypropylene fin bonded into the centre of the backing rod and raised above the pile level. Extruded gaskets and seals Type: Non-cellular (solid) elastopressive seals. Material: - Rubber products (neoprene, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) or silicone rubber): To

BS 4255-1. - Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, E type compounds, colour fastness grade B. Priming Compatibility: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials.

2.4 GLASS IDENTIFICATION

Safety glazing materials Identification: Identify each piece or panel, to AS 1288.

2.5 LOUVRE WINDOW ASSEMBLIES

General Description: Provide louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe and able to withstand the permissible-stress-design wind pressure for that location without failure or permanent distortion of members, and without louvre blade flutter. Adjustable louvres Description: Provide louvre blades clipped into pivoting blade holders to stiles or coupling mullions, linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating lockable handle incorporating a latching device.

Page 127: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Louvre Windows

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 127 of 140

2.6 INSECT SCREENS

Fixed screens General: Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device which permits removal for cleaning.

2.7 SECURITY WINDOW GRILLES

General General: Provide proprietary metal security grille screens, or operable screen and frame, fixed to the building structure with tamper resistant fastenings. Security window grilles: To AS 5040. Installation: To AS 5039. Security mesh: Equal to Invisi-gard 316 grade stainless steel mesh secured to MS window box

2.8 ALUMINIUM FRAME FINISHES

Anodised Standard: To AS 1231. Thickness: 25 microns. Colour: natural satin anodised.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION

General Timber reveals: Prime all surfaces of timber reveals which are to be painted before fixing to aluminium frames.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Glazing General: Install the glass as follows: - Permanently fix in place each piece of glass to withstand the normal loadings and ambient

conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials. - No transfer of building movements to the glass. - Watertight and airtight for external glazing. Temporary marking: Use a method which does not damage the glass. Remove marking on completion. Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials. Heat absorbing glass: Provide wheel cut edges without damage or blemishes and with minimum feather in locations exposed to direct sunlight. Louvre windows General: Install louvre windows frames, as follows: - Plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances. - Fixed or anchored to the building structure in conformance with the wind action requirements. - Isolated from any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening. - Allowing for thermal movement.

Page 128: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Louvre Windows

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 128 of 140

Flashing and weatherings General: Install flashings, weather bars, storm moulds, joint sealant and pointing to prevent the ingress of water between the window frame and the building structure under the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building. Fixing General: Do not penetrate metal flashings with fixings. Fastener spacing (nominal): 600 mm and maximum 150 mm from reveal ends. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners. Use size and type to suit window unit size and wind loading conditions. Packing: Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing. Joints Requirement: Make accurately fitted tight joints so that fasteners and fixing devices such as pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are not visible on exposed surfaces. Sealants: If priming is recommended, prime surfaces in contact with jointing materials. Operation General: Make sure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces and are lubricated. Protection Removal: Remove temporary protection measures from the following: - Contact mating surfaces before joining up. - Exposed surfaces. Repair of finish Polyester or fluoropolymer coatings: Contact supplier for approval to apply touch up products, otherwise replace damaged material. Trim General: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trims using materials and finishes matching the window frames. Make neat and clean junctions between frames and the adjoining building surfaces.

3.3 COMPLETION

Trade clean Method: Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water, finishing with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials. Extent: All frames and glass surfaces inside and out. Warranties Louvre windows: Provide a warranty as follows: - Form: Against failure of materials and operation under normal environment and use conditions. - Period: As offered by the manufacturer. - Powder coating: As offered by the manufacturer for the selected finish. - Hardware: As offered by the manufacturer.

Page 129: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Signage

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 129 of 140

SIGNAGE

1 GENERAL

All statutory signage is as per WSPT signage consultants package. The building mounted Male / Female identification signage is as per the architectural drawings and as outlined in Metalwork section.

Page 130: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Painting

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 130 of 140

PAINTING

1 GENERAL

1.1 AIMS

Responsibilities General: Provide coating systems to substrates as follows: - Consistent in colour, gloss level, texture and dry film thickness. - Free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities. - Paint systems fully opaque. - Clear finishes at the level of transparency consistent with the product. - Fully adhered. Selections: Conform to the Selections. PAINT FINISH - Refer to Appendix A – Schedule F Finishes CLEAR TIMBER FINISH - Refer to Timberwork Section

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General General: Conform to the General requirements worksection. Associated worksections Associated worksections: Materials and Finishes schedule

1.3 STANDARDS

Painting General: Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS/NZS 2311 which are referenced in this worksection.

1.4 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply. - Standard: To AS/NZS 2310. - Substrate: The surface to which a sealant must bond. - Background: The surface to which the undercoat is applied. - Paint: A product in liquid form, which when applied to a surface, forms a dry film having protective,

decorative or other specific technical properties. - Sealer: A product used to seal substrates to prevent: . Materials from bleeding through to the surface. . Reaction of the substrate with incompatible top coats. . Undue absorption of the following coat into the substrate.

- Primer, prime coat: The first coat of a painting system that helps bind subsequent coats to the substrate and which may inhibit its deterioration.

- Undercoat: An intermediate coat formulated to prepare a primed surface or other prepared surface for the finishing coat.

- Finish coat: The final coat of a coating system. - Gloss: The optical property of a surface, characterised by its ability to reflect light specularly. - Sheen: Gloss which is observed on an apparently matt surface at glancing angles of incidence.

Page 131: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Painting

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 131 of 140

- Levels of gloss finish: When the specular direction is 60 degrees, a surface with the following specular gloss reading are defined as follows: . Full gloss finish between 50 and 85 gloss units. . Semi gloss between 20 and 50 gloss units. . Low gloss between 5 and 20 gloss units ( also known as low sheen). . Flat finish < 5 gloss units (also known as matt).

- Opacity: The ability of a paint to obliterate the colour difference of a substrate. - Adhesion: The sum total of forces of attachment between a dry film and its substrate. - Gloss unit: Numerical value for the amount of specular reflection relative to that of a standard

surface under the same geometric conditions. -

1.5 INSPECTION

Witness points Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following by the Architect: - Painting stages: . Completion of final face coat

- Clear finishing stages: . After application of final clear finishing coat.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Clear finish coated samples General: Submit pieces of timber matching the timber to be used in the works, prepared, puttied, stained, sealed and coated in accordance with the specified system, of sufficient size so that, each piece can be cut into 4 segments, marked for identification, and distributed as directed. -

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS

Paint brand Source: Use only paint brands from manufacturers that are members of the Australian Paint Manufacturers Federation. Quality: If the product is offered in a number of levels of quality, provide premium quality lines. Combinations General: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system. Clear timber finish systems: Provide only the combinations of putty, stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats. Delivery General: Deliver paints to the site in the manufacturer’s labelled and unopened containers. Tinting General: Provide only products which are colour tinted by the manufacturer or supplier. Toxic ingredients General: Comply with the requirements of Appendix P Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP). Standards Paint types: Conform to the Australian Standard as noted below. Rangers Station Ceiling: Ceiling Matt acrylic

Page 132: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Painting

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 132 of 140

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Standards General: To AS/NZS 2311 Sections 3. Order of work Other trades: Before painting, complete the work of other trades as far as practicable within the area to be painted, except for installation of fittings, floor sanding and laying flooring materials. Clear finishes: Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same area. Protection Fixtures: Remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation. Adjacent surfaces: Protect adjacent finished surfaces liable to damage from painting operations. ‘Wet paint’ warning General: Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the paint is dry. Restoration General: Clean off marks, paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their original condition. Touch up damaged decorative paintwork or misses only with the paint batch used in the original application. Substrate preparation General: Prepare substrates to receive the painting systems. Cleaning: Clean down the substrate surface. Do not cause undue damage to the substrate or damage to, or contamination of, the surroundings. Filling: Fill cracks and holes with fillers, sealants, putties or grouting cements as appropriate for the finishing system and substrate, and sand smooth. Clear finish: Provide filler tinted to match the substrate. Clear timber finish systems: Prepare the surface so that its attributes will show through the clear finish without blemishes, by methods which may involve the following: - Removal of bruises. - Removal of discolourations, including staining by oil, grease and nailheads. - Bleaching where necessary to match the timber colour sample. - Puttying. - Fine sanding (last abrasive no coarser than 220 grit) to show no scratches across the grain.

3.2 PAINTING

Standard General: To AS/NZS 2311 Section 6. Light levels General: ≥400 lux. Drying General: Use a moisture meter to demonstrate that the moisture content of the substrate is at or below the recommended maximum level for the type of paint and the substrate material. Paint application General: Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur. Apply subsequent coats after the manufacturer’s recommended drying period has elapsed. Priming before fixing General: Apply one coat of wood primer (2 coats to end grain) to the back of the following before fixing in position: - External fascia boards.

Page 133: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Painting

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development Page 133 of 140

- Timber door and window frames. - Bottoms of external doors. - Associated trims and glazing beads. - Timber board cladding. Spraying General: If the paint application is by spraying, use conventional or airless equipment which does the following: - Satisfactorily atomises the paint being applied. - Does not require the paint to be thinned beyond the maximum amount recommended by the

manufacturer. - Does not introduce oil, water or other contaminants into the applied paint. Paint with known health hazards: Not permitted on site. Sanding Clear finishes: Sand the sealer using the finest possible abrasive (no coarser than 320 grit) and avoid cutting through the colour. Take special care with round surfaces and edges. Repair of galvanizing General: For galvanized surfaces which have been subsequently welded, prime the affected area. Primer: Organic zinc rich coating for the protection of steel. Tinting General: Tint each coat of an opaque coating system so that each has a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat, except for top coats in systems with more than one top coat. Services General: If not embedded, paint new services and equipment including in plant rooms, except chromium, anodised aluminium, GRP, UPVC, stainless steel, non-metallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces. Repaint proprietary items only if damaged.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 PAINTING SCHEDULES

General Number of coats: Unless specified as one or two coat systems, each paint system consists of at least 3 coats. Final coat selection: To the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting schedule. Low VOC emitting paints Provide the following low odour/low environmental impact paint types where noted in the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting schedule with the following VOC limits: - Primers and undercoats: < 5 g/litre. - Low gloss white or light coloured latex paints for broardwall areas: < 5 g/litre. - Coloured low gloss latex paints: < 85 g/litre. - Gloss latex paints for timber doors and trims: < 90 g/litre. Painting systems New unpainted interior surfaces: To AS/NZS 2311 Table 5.1. New unpainted exterior surfaces: To AS/NZS 2311 Table 5.2. Specialised painting systems: To AS/NZS 2311 clause 5.2 for the following final coats: - High build textured or membrane finishes (B38 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack gloss pigmented polyurethane (B44 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack epoxy (B29 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack water based epoxy (B29A to AS/NZS 2311). Previously painted surfaces: Sealer: refer to materials and finishes schedule Undercoat: refer to materials and finishes schedule Consult manufacturer.

Page 134: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix A

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX A

MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE

Page 135: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B SCHEDULE F – FINISHES

F01

AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 1 OF 1 STANIC HARDING 1505 PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

This schedule is broken into the following parts: PART 1 – GENERAL NOTES PART 2 – SELECTIONS PART 3 – ISSUE REGISTER PART 1 – GENERAL NOTES

1. All parts of this schedule are to be read in conjunction with the Architectural Drawings, Architectural Specifications

and other Architectural Schedules. 2. Selections are marked on the architectural drawings with the codes as noted below. 3. This schedule does not supersede the drawings and all have equal weight. Any omissions or discrepancies should

be brought to the attention of the Architect. 4. Comply in all respects to current editions of the NCC/BCA and Australian standards and in accordance with best

practice and manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions.

PART 2 – SELECTIONS

CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION

AAL Aluminium Soffit Product: Perforated Aluminium panels equal to P240 custom. Finish: Natural Satin Anodised 25 Microns Supplier: Arrow Metals

CON Concrete Product: Insitu concrete screed Finish: Honed “Salt and Pepper” finish. MUST meet all slip resistance codes. Fully penetrative sealant

CT Ceramic Tile Product: small rectangualr format ceramic tiles suitbake for exterior use Finish: Gloss – Colour TBS Supplier: TBC Provisional Sum: Allow $120.00 / m2 supply cost only

MP Mirror panel Product: Proprietary Mirror Finish: Supplier: RBA refer Schedule C01

MR Metal Deck Roofing Product: Metal deck roofing Spandek 0.48mm Finish: Natural Zincalume Supplier: Lysaght

MS Mild steel Product: Mild steel suppiied ort fabricated as per design intent drawings Finish: Face quality Hot dipped galvanised finish with no blemishes or dags. Grind off all branding

st/st Stainless steel Product: 316 grade Stainless Steel cladding Finish: Electropolish- Satin

st/st-1 Proprietary stainless steel cladding

Product: Rimex Stainless steel cladding Finish: natural – “Linen”

TIM Timber Product: Recycled Blackbutt Timber Finish: Clear Sealer

TR Translucent Roofing Product: Webglas GC + gel coated woven mat fibreglass reinforced polyester- Spandek profile Finish: Ice Clear Supplier: Ampelite

PART 3 – ISSUE STATUS

ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION

01 17/12/15 Tender Issue

Page 136: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix B

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX B

FINISHES AND FIXTURES SCHEDULE

Page 137: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

DOBLIN RALPH HOUSE AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B

SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

C01

AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 1 OF 3 STANIC HARDING 1505 PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

FITTINGS + FIXTURE SCHEDULE

ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER IMAGE

ACCESS CUBICLE X 1 OFF PER BUILDING

WC Pan Accessible SS Pan S or P Trap (includes white seat, no lid) Code: RBA8851-428 Finish: Stainless steel

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Grab Rails 90° Wraparound Grab Bar RH, Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA4091-111

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Backrest Accessible Compliant Backrest Finish: White polyurethane Code: RBA4150-101

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Concealed Cistern

Invisi Series II cistern – Structural Brick Wall Code: 237001 Allow for 45° bend

Caroma

Cistern Buttons Dual WC Flush Valve, Mains Pressure Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA3001-160

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Basin Curvalinear Basin, Trap Cover, and Tap Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA8889-186

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Nappy Change Table

Fully recessed Baby Changing Station Code: KB110-SSRE Finish: Stainless Steel

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Page 138: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

DOBLIN RALPH HOUSE AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B

SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

C01

AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 2 OF 3 STANIC HARDING 1505 PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER IMAGE

Toilet Roll Holder Vandal-resistant double-roll toilet tissue dispenser Finish: Stainless Steel Code: RBA 8143-100

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Hand Dryer Trimline Hand Dryer Finish: Stainless Steel Code: B7128E

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Soap Dispenser

Contura Soap Dispensar, Surface Mounted Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: B4112

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Mirror

Mirror Finish: Stainless Steel Channel and Safety Glass Mirror Code: B7128E

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Clothes Hook Cublice Hook Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: B542

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

AMBULANT TOILET X 2 OFF (1 X MALE + 1 X FEMALE) PER BUILDING

Cistern Buttons Dual WC Flush Valve, Mains Pressure Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA3001-160

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

WC Pan Ambulant SS Pan P Trap Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA8841-156

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Page 139: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

DOBLIN RALPH HOUSE AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B

SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

C01

AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 3 OF 3 STANIC HARDING 1505 PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER IMAGE

Grab Rail 90° Grab Rail, Ambidextrous Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA4090-450

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

STANDARD TOILET X 7 OFF (2 X MALE + 5 X FEMALE) + 2 OFF URINALS PER BUILDING

Cistern Buttons Dual WC Flush Valve, Mains Pressure Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA3001-160

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

WC Pan SS Pan P or S Trap Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA8851-100

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Urinal Urinal Finish: Satin Stainless Steel Code: RBA8820-100

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

CENTRAL PUBLIC SPACE X 1 PER BUILDING

Basin set Vandal resistant Sensor tap Finish: Bright Chrome Code: RBA 12 11-600 Four (4) basin sets per communal wash basin

RBA Group Ph 1300 788 778

Amendments

ISSUE DATE REVISION

1 21/10/15 75% Review

2 11/12/15 100% Complete Tender Review

3 17/12/15 Tender issue

Page 140: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix C

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX C

METALWORK SCHEDULE

Page 141: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

M01

1505 AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 1 OF 4 STANIC HARDING PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

METALWORK SCHEDULE This is a performance specification and the Contract drawings show generic design principles and design intent only. The contractor shall design and engineer all structural components to suit the design intent. All details and final arrangements are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to any fabrication commencing.

Shop drawings of all elements must be submitted to the Superintendents representative prior to the commencement of any fabrication.

Architectural metalwork fabrication is to be of the best quality with all exposed finishes being first class. All fixings are to be concealed and all thickness are to be as noted and be fit for the task. All stainless steel fabrication is to furniture quality with no visible welds. This schedule is to be used in conjunction with all drawings and details to determine full scope. This schedule does not supersede the drawings and all have equal weight. Any omissions should be brought to the attention of the Architect.

Exposed structural steel work is to be hot dipped galvanised with all dags and slight imperfections addressed prior to site delivery. The galvanised finish is the finished face so attention should be paid to the surface preparation and the faces post galvanising.

LOCATION ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER

External Open Screen

Type A + B

Screen surround frame

Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

This is fabricated to form a custom tapered frame ready for the timber batten screen. The vertical LHS of the frame is 250mm wide at the top and 150mm wide at the base. This tapered angle has a 100m high up stand and the thickness of the plate is nom. 13mm minimum. The tapering head angle runs from 250m wide to 150mm wide on the RHS of the frame. The vertical on the RHS (right hand side) is therefore 150mm at the head and 250mm at the base. The tapering base angle runs from 150mm at the LHS to 250mm wide on the RHS of the frame. A 150mm x 100mm x 12mm bracing angle runs from the 250mm wide LHS top corner to the 250mm wide RHS bottom corner.

The frame is to be fabricated off site with all junctions to be mitres or leading edges concealed. The leading edges must be square and true. The all edges are to be square face finished to allow for neat junctions between other surfaces and materials.

Grind off all branding and codes on exposed steel work.

All element junctions must align, as misalignment will mean rejection.

Thee frames are erected in pairs and they are bolted together using suitable countersunk fixing at set centres. The fixings and the gap between are dressed with a nom. 40mm angle set back from the leading edge on both sides. This dresses the recess.

All welds are to be continuous and consistent fillet type that are ground flush for a face finish.

Base of screen is set off finished floor level via small CHS stubs nom 76 dia x 150mm. These conceal the mechanical fixing into the floor slab. The fixings are to be suitable countersunk type.

All support plates and fixings must be concealed as shown.

Holes will need to be drilled in the base and head angles of the MS frame at set centres for timber screen fixing. Refer to drawings.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

External Closed Screen

Type A + B

Screen surround frame

As above however the detail at the base is a continuous 150mm x 75mm RHS welded to the base angle. This is due to a concrete block wall being located behind this “closed” screen. The screen is also fixed into place at the base by fixing through the skirting member and fixing into the slab.

Page 142: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

M01

1505 AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 2 OF 4 STANIC HARDING PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

LOCATION ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

Top of the Open Screen Wall

Perimeter angle Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

A 150mmx 150mm continuous angle to be mechanically fixed to the top of the screen. This may be butted together due to the resultant length of this element. The butt joint should be located so it aligns with an adjoining element and this can be determined at shop drawing stage.

The all edges are to be square face finished to allow for neat junctions between other surfaces and materials.

Grind off all branding and codes on exposed steel work.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Parapet MS angle Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

A 150mm x 150mm parapet MS angle runs across the top of both screen elements and the tiles block walls. Refer to drawings for scope. This angle provides a secure fixing for the tensile security mesh system. It also in some cases provides a trim edge for the top edge of the wall tiles. Where the parapet angle follows a radiussed wall below. The angle stops at the point of the curve and a rolled ms flat of equal height is to continue and follow the line of the radius. The angle continues again on the other side to continue the parpaet line.

This may be butted together due to the resultant length of this element. The butt joint should be located so it aligns with an adjoining element and this can be determined at shop drawing stage.

The all edges are to be square face finished to allow for neat junctions between other surfaces and materials.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Male + Female Corridor

MS gates Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

75mm x 50mm x 12mm top and base angles and 75mmx 12mm ms flat sides forms the surround frame for the security gates. The angle surround is drilled to secure the timber screen inserts. The gate has a head frame The gates at supposted at the base by an MS angle fixed to the tiles block wall using suitbale countersunk fixings. This is to be sized to accommodate the ball bearing pivot and allow the proper function of the gate and support its weight. Ensure all external corners that are accessible to the public have a minimum pencil round to avoid injury. Sample to be approved.

The gate is supported at the top by a suitable thickness MS flat that has been bolted to the perimetre angle

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Male + Female Corridor

MS strike plate Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

100mm x 12mm plate that runs from base of external screen to top. This is welded to the surround frame off site and is checked out around the base and head angle.

By Contractor

Male Channel Custom channel 100mm x 75mm x 12mm set into wall adjacent to gate leading edge when in a closed position. This element has a holes drilled ready for pad lock so the gate can be locked open.

By Contractor

Page 143: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

M01

1505 AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 3 OF 4 STANIC HARDING PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

LOCATION ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

External screen / All Access WC

Recessed trim Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

12mm thick ms continuous plate that is recessed between the external screen and the tiles internal walls. This runs from finish floor level to top of tiled wall.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

External screen/ Store

Recessed trim As above By Contractor

Rangers Station

Window box Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings.

10mm ms plates that are fabricated to form vertical projecting window box elements. These two boxes at connected by ms plate and the whole is fabricated a one unit off site. The units are located between the parapet angle and the skirting angle as shown on the drawings. Mechanically fix the window boxes to the adjacent block walls and the head and base. The louvre window frames must conceal fixings.

All welds are to be continuous fillet type that are then ground flush, with junctions treated with filler/bog that is fit for task. All exposed edges must square and true and all corner junctions are to be 90 deg.

The all edges are to be square face finished to allow for neat junctions between other surfaces and materials. Corners are to mitred

The boxes project 40mm from finished tiled external wall and nom. 6mm from internal cement render.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Rangers Station

Hatch Refer to structural engineers and architectural drawings and Doors, gate + Hatch Section

The rebate for the flip up hatch is to be trimmed in a continuous 65mm x 65mm x 10mm custom angle. This unit is secured using suitable countersunk fixings. The angle must align with the exterior tiled wall. Provide holes for suitable piano hinge at the head. Edge of hatch trimmed in 3mm thick MS flat. Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Hatch Internal face of hatch clad in secretly fixed Rimex stainless steel in “Linen” pattern.

By Contractor

Ledge Secretly fixed 316 grade st/st cladding in electropolished satin finish.

By Contractor

Amenities WC Partitions Refer to architectural drawings and Partitions Section

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

External tiled wall

Skirting angle Install a 150mm high x 25mm skirting angle to the base of the external tiled wall. The skirting is to align with the 150mm gap at the base of the timber screens. The skirting angle should be rolled to match the corner radius.

Finish Hot dipped galvanised

By Contractor

Page 144: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS TYPE A + B SCHEDULE C – FITTINGS + FIXTURES

M01

1505 AMENITIES PAVILIONS, BUNGARRIBEE PARKLANDS PAGE 4 OF 4 STANIC HARDING PTY LTD NOMINATED ARCHITECT: ANDREW STANIC 5294 December 2015

LOCATION ITEM SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER

Central entry Custom hand basin

This unit is to be fabricated in line with high quality commercial grade st/st fabrication. It is consist of a 316 grade satin electropolished stainless steel. The top is a teardrop shape that houses a 730mm dia x 185mm deep custom stainless steel basin with a central 200m dia st/st island. This “island” is 60mm higher than the bench top height and is to house Four (4) selected vandal resist basin cocks. The diameter of this “island may change slightly to accommodate tap ware.

A circular grated drain equal to custom Stormtech type follows the circumference of the island to drain the basin. The basin falls to this grated vandal resistant drain

The stainless bench top as a seamless 100mm deep square edge.

The body of the basin is fabricated out 25 x 25 SHS sections set out to provide for the even curve required. These are welded to a MS base plate that follows the plan shape of the unit and this is bolt fixed to four (4) off 100mm dia CHS support posts. These are concealed by a st/st clad base with a finished dia of 600mm. This recessed base also conceals the services. A base of this unit is removable to allow suitable service access.

Marine grade bending ply is to be screwed and glued to the SHS frame and then sealed ready for the secret fixing of suitable gauge electropolished 316 grade stainless steel cladding. This facing is broken into four panels, three are fixed and one is an access panel. The panels at butt jointed but the st/st return to clad the edges. The fixings a st/st allen key countersink type

Bench top height is 850mm above finished floor level.

Sensor tap ware requires power supply. Refer to Electrical Engineers documentation.

ALLOW A PROVIONAL SUM ALLOW OF $5.5K EXCL GST PER UNIT. THIS DOES NOT INCLUDE FOR SELECTED TAP WARE

By Contractor

Doors Flush panel Doors D01,D02,D03

These door faces will be clad in secretly fixed Rimex stainless steel cladding in ‘Linen” pattern.

Amendments

ISSUE DATE REVISION

1 17/12.15 Tender issue

Page 145: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix D

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX D

DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Page 146: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Page 1 of 3

Customer: Stanic Harding

Quote No: Q-14873

Project: Bungarribee Amenities

Project Address:

Toilet Partition Doors TYPE A : x9

MDZ-B400/B SSS Pull Pair BTB 450x14mm SSS 9

801 SCP LW TOILET INDICATOR BOLT 9

D01 TYPE A : Store Room

MDZ-L70-SSS Lever 70 Rosefix Pair SSS 1

L9C21SL Right-hand, Satin Chrome Plate 1

H-C4-OV-SC Oval C4 Cylinder Satin Chrome 1

Keying alike-GP1 Keying alike charge Group 1 1

MDZ-OC-SSS

Oval Cylinder Cover with concealed fixings. Marine grade steel. Satin Finish.

1

MDZ-TT01-SSS

MDZ-TT01 SSS Turn Escutcheon Satin Stainless Steel

1

LY9-CA6 Privacy adaptor 6a 1

SS088

Strike Shield - concealed fix to suit cylindrical locks, lever on rose, deadbolt & key in lever.

1

DHS100FSX

BRD BUTT HINGES, 100x75x2.5, FIXED PIN, BUTTON TOP, MARINE GRADE 316, SATIN

3

Page 147: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Page 2 of 3

D02 TYPE A : WC

MDZ-L70-SSS Lever 70 Rosefix Pair SSS 1

L9C34SL Left Hand Satin Chrome Plate Privacy Latch 1

LY9-CA6 Privacy adaptor 6a 1

MDZ-TT02-SSS

Disabled Turnsnib on round rose Satin Stainless Steel

1

MDZ-ER01-SSS Indicator emergency release turn snib 1

TS92G24GNAB

Complete unit, Body, Slide channel and arm with angle bracket, Push Side Silver

1

DHS100FSX

BRD BUTT HINGES, 100x75x2.5, FIXED PIN, BUTTON TOP, MARINE GRADE 316, SATIN

3

G01 TYPE A : Entry Female WC

Note Pivots by Others

G02 TYPE A : Entry Male WC

Note Pivots by Others

Toilet Partition Doors TYPE B : x9

MDZ-B400/B SSS Pull Pair BTB 450x14mm SSS 9

801 SCP LW TOILET INDICATOR BOLT 9

D01 TYPE B : Store Room

MDZ-L70-SSS Lever 70 Rosefix Pair SSS 1

L9C21SL Right-hand, Satin Chrome Plate 1

H-C4-OV-SC Oval C4 Cylinder Satin Chrome 1

Keying alike-GP1 Keying alike charge Group 1 1

MDZ-OC-SSS

Oval Cylinder Cover with concealed fixings. Marine grade steel. Satin Finish.

1

MDZ-TT01-SSS

MDZ-TT01 SSS Turn Escutcheon Satin Stainless Steel

1

LY9-CA6 Privacy adaptor 6a 1

SS088

Strike Shield - concealed fix to suit cylindrical locks, lever on rose, deadbolt & key in lever.

1

DHS100FSX

BRD BUTT HINGES, 100x75x2.5, FIXED PIN, BUTTON TOP, MARINE GRADE 316, SATIN

3

Page 148: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Page 3 of 3

D02 TYPE B : WC

MDZ-L70-SSS Lever 70 Rosefix Pair SSS 1

L9C34SL Left Hand Satin Chrome Plate Privacy Latch 1

LY9-CA6 Privacy adaptor 6a 1

MDZ-TT02-SSS

Disabled Turnsnib on round rose Satin Stainless Steel

1

MDZ-ER01-SSS Indicator emergency release turn snib 1

TS92G24GNAB

Complete unit, Body, Slide channel and arm with angle bracket, Push Side Silver

1

DHS100FSX

BRD BUTT HINGES, 100x75x2.5, FIXED PIN, BUTTON TOP, MARINE GRADE 316, SATIN

3

D03 TYPE B : Rangers Station

MDZ-L70-SSS Lever 70 Rosefix Pair SSS 1

L9V21SL Right-hand, Satin Chrome Plate 1

H-C4-OV-SC Oval C4 Cylinder Satin Chrome 1

MDZ-TT01-SSS

MDZ-TT01 SSS Turn Escutcheon Satin Stainless Steel

1

Keying alike-GP1 Keying alike charge Group 1 1

MDZ-OC-SSS

Oval Cylinder Cover with concealed fixings. Marine grade steel. Satin Finish.

1

SS088

Strike Shield - concealed fix to suit cylindrical locks, lever on rose, deadbolt & key in lever.

1

DHS100FSX

BRD BUTT HINGES, 100x75x2.5, FIXED PIN, BUTTON TOP, MARINE GRADE 316, SATIN

3

G01 TYPE B : Entry Female WC

Note Pivots by Others

G02 TYPE B : Entry Male WC

Note Pivots by Others

Page 149: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix E

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX E

WALLMULLA HINGES

Page 150: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station
Jeff Clark
Foley Park Hinges
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
For COS
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Growbuilt
Jeff Clark
JC
Jeff Clark
12/03/13
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
003
Jeff Clark
A4
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
003
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Jeff Clark
Page 151: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix F

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX F

KORDON TERMITE BARRIER

Page 152: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station
Page 153: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station
Page 154: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

AMENITIES PAVILIONS – TYPE A + B Appendix G

STANIC HARDING PTY LTD December 2015 ISSUE 1 Stage 1 Architectural Bungarribee Parklands Development

APPENDIX G

LATRICETE

Page 155: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

3701 Fortified Mortar Bed

1. PRODUCT NAME

3701 Fortified Mortar Bed

2. MANUFACTURERLATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

3701 Fortified Mortar Bed is a polymer fortified blend of carefully selected polymers, Portland cement and graded aggregates. 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed does not require the use of latex admix, you only need to add water to produce thick bed mortar with exceptional strength.

Uses n Interior and exterior applications

n Wet and dry applications

n Bonded and non-bonded thick bed mortar applications

n Conventional thick bed mortar applications

n Concrete repairs

Advantages n Polymer fortified – no need for latex additives

n Premixed – no job site blending of powders required

n Economical – saves time and money

n High strength formula

n Pumpable for large scale veneer projects

n Exceeds ASTM C270 requirements

n For use as a scratch or finish coat in place of standard or normal mortars

Suitable Substrates n Concrete

n Ceramic tile and stone^

n Concrete masonry

n Brick masonry

n Exterior glue plywood*

n Cement mortar beds

n Cement backer board**

n Cement plaster

n Cement terrazzo * For interior only, over cleavage membrane with wire reinforcing minimum 50 mm thick. ** Consult cement backer board manufacturer for specific installation recommendations and

to verify acceptability for exterior use. ^ Refer to TDS1009 for more details.

Packaging20 kg bag; 56 bags per pallet

Available ColourGrey

Approximate Coverage per 20 kg bag1 m2 at 10 mm thick

2 m2 at 5 mm thick

Shelf LifeFactory sealed containers of the 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed are guaranteed to be of first quality for one (1) year* if stored off the ground in a dry area. * High humidity will reduce the shelf life of the bagged product

Limitations n Use LATAPOXY® 300 Adhesive for installing green marble

or water sensitive stone, agglomerates or resin backed stone and tile.

n Use white mortar for installing white or light coloured marble or stone.

n Not for use over carpet adhesive, vinyl tile cutback adhesive or plastic laminates.

n Not for direct use over hardwood or strip wood flooring, particle board, luan plywood or Masonite®.

n Not for use over expansion joints or structural movement cracks.

n Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproof membranes. When a waterproof membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproof Membrane.

n Note: Surfaces must be structurally sound, stable and rigid enough to support ceramic/stone tile, thin brick and similar finishes. Substrate deflection under all live, dead and impact loads, including concentrated loads, must not exceed L/360 for thin bed ceramic tile/brick installations or L/480 for thin bed stone installations where L=span length (except where local building codes specify more stringent deflection requirements).

DS-1000-0214

Page 156: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

Cautions n During cold weather, protect finished work from traffic

until fully cured.

n Do not take internally. Silica sand may cause cancer or serious lung problems. Avoid breathing dust. Wear an approved respirator in dusty areas.

n Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement. Contact LATICRETE for information on reducing the effects of efflorescence.

n Consult MSDS for more safety information.

n Allow a minimum 14 day cure at 21°C after the final grouting period prior to filling water features with water.

n Contains Portland cement and silica sand. May irritate eyes and skin. Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged contact with skin. In case of contact, flush thoroughly with water.

n Keep out of reach of children.

4. TECHNICAL DATA

Performance PropertiesAs per ASTM C270

Water Absorption ANSI A118.7.3.4

5%

28-day Compressive Strength ASTM C270

27.6 – 34.5 MPa

Flexural Strength ANSI A118.7.3.5

7.5 – 8.3 MPa

Shrinkage 7-day Cure ASTM C-157

0.05%

TCNA Service Rating ASTM C-627

Extra Heavy

Working Properties at 21°C

Pot Life 2 hours

Time to Foot Traffic 16 hours

Time to Heavy Traffic 72 hours

Specifications subject to change without notification. Results shown are typical but reflect test procedures used. Actual field performance will depend on installation methods and site conditions.

5. INSTALLATION

All work should be in general accordance with AS3958.1-2007 unless otherwise noted.

PreparationAll surfaces should be between 4°C and 32°C and structurally sound, clean and free of all laitance, dirt, oil, grease, loose peeling paint, concrete sealers or curing compounds. Dry, dusty concrete slabs or masonry should be dampened and excess water swept off. Expansion joints shall be provided through the tile work, over all construction or expansion joints in the substrate. Follow Australian Standards requirements for Expansion Joints in AS3958.1 Section 5.4.5 and AS3958.2 Section 4.5 or TCNA detail EJ-171 “Movement Joints – Vertical & Horizontal”. Do not cover expansion joints with adhesive.

Application

Mortar Bed

Mixing — Dry Pack Consistency for FloorsMix a 20 kg bag of 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed to 1.9 – 2.2 litres of water. Mix to a stiff, semi-dry consistency. Mix ratio may vary dependent upon weight of finish.

Bonded Mortar Bed

InstallationBefore placing mortar, apply a slurry bond coat made from 335 Premium Flexible Adhesive or 4237 Latex

Additive mixed with 211 Crete Filler Powder. While the slurry bond coat is wet, spread the mortar and compact well. If placing tile immediately, apply a slurry bond coat, made from either 335 Premium Flexible Adhesive or 4237 Latex Additive mixed with 211 Crete Filler Powder to the mortar. While the slurry bond coat is wet and sticky, place the tile and beat in well. Refer to TDS1009 “Slurry Bond Coats – When & What to Use” for more information on slurry bond coats.

Unbonded Mortar Bed

InstallationBefore placing mortar, place a cleavage membrane (e.g. 200 µm thick polyethylene sheeting) on the substrate. Place mortar over the cleavage membrane (approximately 1/2 the depth of the mortar bed). Next, place 25 mm x 25 mm to 75 mm x 50 mm, 1.2 mm to 2 mm diameter galvanized welded wire mesh over the mortar. Then, place the balance of the mortar bed. The wire mesh should be suspended in the middle of the mortar bed. Spread the mortar and compact well. Minimum mortar bed thickness shall be 40 mm. If placing tile immediately, apply a slurry bond coat, made from either 335 Premium Flexible Adhesive or 4237 Latex Additive mixed with 211 Crete Filler Powder to the mortar. While the slurry bond coat is wet and sticky, place the tile and beat in well. Refer to TDS1009 “Slurry Bond Coats – When & What to Use” for more information.

Wall Renders

MixingMix a 20 kg of 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed to 2.2 – 2.5 litres of water. Mix to a plastic consistency.

Wall Renders

InstallationNo slurry bond coat is required prior to placing wall renders.

Apply wall render with a steel trowel pressing mortar into good contact with the substrate. Apply “scratch coat” first – not to exceed 12 mm thickness. Scratch mortar before it hardens. After “scratch coat” hardens, apply the “brown or float coat” working the mortar into good contact with the scratch coat. Do not exceed 15 mm thickness per lift. Scratch all lifts that will receive additional float coats. Float wall with steel trowel and straight edges to form a plumb and true mortar surface. Allow the completed render coats to cure for 24 hours at 21° C prior to the installation of tile.

As a Pumped Mortar for Renders and PlasterPumping of 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed should be done when using a liquid plasticizer/pump aid. Confirm with manufacturer of pump aid for compatibility with polymer fortified mortar mixes. Approximate coverage for 10 – 20 kg bags of mortar will be 10 m2 at 10 mm thick. Coverage will vary according to mixing, pumping, placement, job site conditions and rebound. Do not exceed 15 mm thickness per lift/application of pumped render. Scratch up previous lift prior to placing subsequent lifts.

Application

Concrete Repair & Resurfacing — Levelling Mortar Consistency

Mixing Leveling MortarsMix a 20 kg of 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed with 2.2 – 2.5 litres of water. Mix to a plastic consistency. Mix ratio may vary dependent upon weight of finish.

DS-1000-0214

Page 157: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

Concrete Repair & Resurfacing

InstallationBefore placing mortar, apply a slurry bond coat made from 335 Premium Flexible Adhesive or 4237 Latex Additive mixed with 211 Crete Filler Powder. Apply a slurry bond coat to all reinforcing steel and existing clean, sound and stable concrete surfaces just prior to placing the mortar. While the slurry bond coat is wet and sticky place the topping mortar. Compact the surface of the mortar with a flat trowel and ensure all voids are filled. Avoid over troweling.

Cold Weather NoteThe setting of Portland cement mortars and grouts are retarded by low temperatures. Protect finished work for an extended period when installing in cold weather.

Hot Weather NoteThe evaporation of moisture in Portland cement mortars is accelerated by hot, dry conditions. Apply mortar to dampened surfaces and protect freshly spread mortar and finished work when installing in temperatures over 32°C.

Note: A slurry bond coat should also be applied to the edges of mortar beds installed from previous work periods.

CleaningClean tools and tile work with water while mortar is fresh.

6. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information: Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

For online Distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

7. MAINTENANCE

LATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH soap and water. All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on properly maintaining products supplied by other manufacturers.

8. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

9. DISCLAIMER

n The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the best of our knowledge is true and accurate.

n This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

n The use of this product is beyond our control and liability is assumed by the user when used incorrectly and not in accordance with LATICRETE guidelines.

n The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from incorrect usage of this product.

n The specifier or other party responsible for the project must ensure that the details in this data sheet are appropriate for the intended application and that additional detailing is performed for specific design or any areas that fall outside the scope of this data sheet.

n Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout and SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2014 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.

DS-1000-0214

Page 158: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

HYDRO BAN®

1. PRODUCT NAME HYDRO BAN®

2. MANUFACTURER LATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONHYDRO BAN is a thin, load bearing waterproofing/crack isolation membrane that DOES NOT require the use of fabric in the field, coves or corners. HYDRO BAN is a single component self curing liquid rubber polymer that forms a flexible, seamless waterproofing membrane that bonds directly to a wide variety of substrates. HYDRO BAN is a low VOC emitting product that has been GREENGUARD certified. HYDRO BAN is a highly extensible Class 3 membrane suitable for Immersed Installations, Internal Wet Areas and External Above Ground use.

Uses § Interior and exterior use.

§ Residential internal wet area work.

§ Swimming pools, fountains & water features.

§ Shower recesses, stalls and surrounds.

§ Industrial and commercial bathrooms and laundries.

§ Spas and hot tubs

§ Kitchens and food processing areas.

§ Terraces and balconies over occupied spaces.

§ Counter tops and facades

§ Steam rooms when used in conjunction with a vapour barrier.

Advantages § Allows for fast time to flood test*.

§ Does not require the use of fabric.

§ Bonds directly to copper, steel, stainless steel and PVC for flashing to plumbing fixtures only.

§ Thin; only 0.6 mm – 0.9 mm thick when cured.

§ Changes in colour from a light sage to an olive green when dry.

§ Changes in colour works as coverage guide during application.

§ Anti-fracture protection of up to 3 mm over shrinkage and other non-structural cracks†.

§ “Extra Heavy Service” rating per ASTM C627 “Robinson Floor Test”.

§ Inhibits stain-causing mould and mildew growth in the substrate with antimicrobial product protection.

§ Rapid drying for faster time to tile.

§ Lighter colour for ease of inspection.

§ Safe - no solvents and non-flammable.

§ Install tile, brick and stone directly onto membrane.† For gaps 3 mm or less see Data Sheet TDS1003* Refer to cautions section for more information on curing.

Suitable Substrates § Concrete

§ Concrete and brick masonry

§ Cement mortar beds

§ Cement plaster

§ Gypsum wallboard‡

§ Exterior glue plywood‡

§ Ceramic tile and stone**

§ Cement terrazzo**

§ Cement backer board~

‡ Interior application only. Only use approved plywood. Contact LATICRETE if the Gypsum wallboard is treated for moisture blocking.

** If skim coated with a LATICRETE Latex Thin-Set Mortar.~ Contact cement backer board manufacturer for specific installation recommendations and to verify acceptability for

exterior use. Contact LATICRETE if the board is treated for moisture blocking.

Packaging § Commercial Unit: 18.9 litre pail; 36 pails per pallet

§ Trade Unit: 15 litre pail; 48 pails per pallet

§ Mini Unit: 4 x 3.8 litre carton; 48 pails per pallet

Approximate Coverage § Commercial Unit: 23 m2

§ Trade Unit: 18 m2

§ Mini Unit: 4.6 m2

Shelf LifeFactory sealed containers of this product are guaranteed to be of first quality for two (2) years if stored at temperatures >0°C and <43°C.

Limitations § Do not bond to OSB, particle board, Luan, Masonite® or hardwood surfaces.

§ Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproof membranes. When a waterproof membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproof Membrane.

§ Note: Surfaces must be structurally sound, stable and rigid enough to support ceramic/stone tile, thin brick and similar finishes. Substrate deflection under

DS-1036-1015

Page 159: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

all live, dead and impact loads, including concentrated loads, must not exceed L/360 for thin bed ceramic tile/brick installations or L/480 for thin bed stone installations where L=span length.

§ Do not use over dynamic expansion joints, structural cracks or cracks with vertical differential movement (See HYDRO BAN How To Installation Guide, TDS1003, for complete instructions).

§ Do not use over cracks >3 mm in width.

§ Do not use as a vapour barrier (especially in steam rooms).

§ Do not expose unprotected membrane to sun or weather for more than 30 days.

§ Do not expose to negative hydrostatic pressure, excessive vapour transmission, rubber solvents or ketones.

§ Must be covered with ceramic tile, stone, brick, concrete, screeds, terrazzo or other traffic-bearing finish. Use protection board for temporary cover.

§ Do not install over plywood tubs/showers/fountains or similar constructs.

Cautions § Consult MSDS for more safety information.

§ Allow membrane to cure fully prior to flood testing. Typically membranes should be cured for 24 hours at 21°C and 50% RH before flood testing.

§ Some drywall and dryfloor sheets are treated with moisture blocking coatings. Check for compatibility prior to installing HYDRO BAN directly to these surfaces.

§ Maximum amount of moisture in the concrete/mortar bed substrate should not exceed 283 μg/m2/24 hrs per ASTM F-1869 or 75% relative humidity as measured with moisture probes

§ During cold weather, protect finished work from traffic until fully cured.

§ Wet coat thickness is 0.4 mm to 0.6 mm per coat. Use a wet film thickness gauge to check thickness during application.

§ For white and light coloured marbles, use a white LATICRETE Latex Portland Cement Thin Set-Mortar.

§ For green and moisture sensitive marble, agglomerates and resin backed tile and stone use LATAPOXY® 300 Adhesive.

§ Allow wet mortars/plasters (tilers screed bed consistency) to cure for 72 hours at 21°C and 50% RH prior to installing HYDRO BAN. Ensure HYDRO BAN is cured prior to mortar bed application. Allow an additional 24 hours curing for the application of thicker, wetter beds over HYDRO BAN.

§ HYDRO BAN will go from a light sage green to a darker olive green when dry. The second coat should not be applied until the first coat is fully dry. All flood test times should be after the second coat is fully cured with no light sage areas showing.

§ Protect from exposure to traffic or water until fully cured.

4. TECHNICAL DATA

This membrane meets and exceeds the requirements of AS/NZ4858-2004, AS3558.1, ASTM E96, AS4654.1-2012, AS/NZ4347.9 & ASTM C794 for use as a fully bonded "Internal Wet Area Membrane" & "External Above Ground Liquid Applied Non-exposed Membrane.

VOC/LEED Product InformationThis product has been GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified* by the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute under the GREENGUARD Standards for Low Emitting Products in finished form. Certificate number 3595-420

Total VOC’s 0.22 μg/m3

Applicable StandardAS/NZS4858-2004 as per CSIRO

DESCRIPTION VALUES

Classification Class 3

Elongation >450%

Bond Relief required Minimum 12 mm

Moisture vapour transmission 0.86g/m2/24 hours

Physical Properties as per ANSI A118.10 and A118.12

PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST METHOD HYDRO BAN

7-day Hydrostatic Test ANSI A118.10 Pass

7-day Tensile Strength ANSI A118.10 1.8-2.0 MPa

7-day Water Immersion ANSI A118.10 0.7 – 0.83 MPa

7-day Shear Bond ANSI A118.10 1.4 – 1.9 MPa

28-day Shear Strength ANSI A118.10 1.5 – 2.3 MPa

System Crack Resistance Test ANSI A118.12.5-4 Pass (high)

Working PropertiesHYDRO BAN can be applied using a paint brush, roller, trowel. HYDRO BAN may also be applied with airless spraying equipment, please contact LATICRETE for further information. All areas must have two coats to ensure waterproofing capabilities. When using a paint roller, ensure substrate will not show through HYDRO BAN if coated with 0.6 mm – 0.9 mm of dried membrane. Colour changes from a light sage to olive green when fully cured.

5. INSTALLATION

Surface PreparationSurface temperature must be 10 – 32°C during application and for 24 hours after installation. All substrates must be structurally sound, clean and free of airborne contaminants, salt, dirt, oil, grease, paint, laitance, efflorescence, concrete sealers or curing compounds. New concrete slabs shall be damp cured and a minimum of 14 days old before application. Make rough or uneven concrete smooth to a wood float or fine textured finish (CSP2 - CSP3) with a with a LATICRETE Underlayment. Do not level with gypsum or asphalt based products. Maximum deviation in plane must not exceed 5 mm in 3 m when measured from the high spots. Dampen hot, dry surfaces and sweep off excess water – installation may be made on a damp surface. All surfaces should be wiped down with a damp sponge to clean and hydrate the surface.

Pre-Treat Cracks & JointsFill all substrate cracks ,̂ cold joints, and control joints to a smooth finish using a LATICRETE latex fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in non structural joints and cracks. Apply a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN approximately 200 mm wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or roller (heavy napped roller cover).

Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Transitions

Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall transitions to a smooth finish at changes in plane using a LATICRETE latex fortified thin-set mortar. Alternatively, a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions <3 mm. Apply a 12 mm bond relief fillet of HYDRO BAN Adhesive and Sealant to joints requiring bond relief as per AS3740 & AS4654 and allow to dry before detailing the membrane over.

Pre-Treat DrainsMembrane to drainage connections maybe made over concrete and other floors. Where termination of the drainage riser has been made at slab or topping level the membrane shall be turned down and finished a minimum of 50 mm into the de-burred, securely fixed riser. Pack or fill any gaps around pipes with HYDRO BAN Adhesive and Sealant and allow to cure prior to applying membrane. Prepare the approved PVC or metal surface as previously stated just prior to application of the liquid.

Where a drainage flange is installed the membrane shall be applied over the top of the securely fixed flange and be turned down and finished a minimum of 50 mm into the flange body. Prepare the approved PVC or metal surface as previously stated just prior to application of the liquid. HYDRO BAN® can be applied with a

DS-1036-1015

Page 160: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

paint brush, paint roller (heavy napped roller) or a 5 mm x 4 mm V-notch trowel. When the first coat^^ has dried to a uniform olive green colour, apply a second liberal coat^ of HYDRO BAN liquid.

Pre-Treat PenetrationsAllow for a minimum 3 mm space between drains, pipes, lights or other penetrations and surrounding ceramic tile, stone or brick. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a LATICRETE Latex fortified thin-set mortar. Apply a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN liquid around penetrations and allow to cure. Cover with a second coat^^ of HYDRO BAN as soon as the first coat is cured. Bring HYDRO BAN up to level of tile or stone. When dry, seal flashing with Tile and Stone Sealant.

Crack IsolationCrack Isolation (partial coverage) – Crack suppression must be applied a minimum of 3 times the width of the tile or stone being installed. The tile installed over the crack cannot be in contact with the concrete. Follow TCNA Method F125 for the treatment of hairline cracks, shrinkage cracks and saw cut or control joints. Apply a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN to a minimum of three times the width of the tile using a paint roller or paint brush and allow to dry. After the first coat has dried to the touch, install second liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN over the first coat and allow to dry.

Main ApplicationInsert minimum 12 mm bond relief fillet as required per AS3740/AS4654 for a Class 3 membrane when doing “wet area work” or "external above-ground work. Use HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant for all bond relief fillets, DO NOT use aromatic solvent based sealants or sealants containing rubber solvents or ketones. Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN with brush or roller over substrate including pre-treated areas and allow to cure (turn dark olive green). Immediately apply another liberal coat^^ of HYDRO BAN over the first cured coat of HYDRO BAN. Let topcoat dry to the touch, approximately 1 – 3 hours at 21°C and 50% RH. When last coat has dried to the touch, inspect final surface for pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects. HYDRO BAN will dry to a dark olive green colour when fully cured. Use additional HYDRO BAN to seal defects.

ProtectionProvide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin bed ceramic tile, stone or brick installation, against exposure to rain or other water for a minimum of 24 hours at 21°C and 50% RH.

Flood TestingAllow membrane to cure fully before flood testing. Cold and/or wet conditions will require a longer curing time. For surface and/or ambient temperatures between 10 - 20°C allow more than 48 hours after cure prior to flood testing.

Installing FinishesOnce HYDRO BAN has dried to the touch and is dark olive green, ceramic tile, stone or brick may be installed by the thin bed method with a LATICRETE Latex Thin-Set Mortar or LATICRETE Multipurpose Powder Thin-Set Mortar. Allow HYDRO BAN to cure longer before covering with concrete, thick bed mortar, screeds, toppings, coatings, epoxy adhesives, terrazzo or moisture sensitive resilient or wood flooring. Do not use solvent-based adhesives directly on HYDRO BAN.

^ Refer to Limitations section for unacceptable cracks.^^ Dry coat thickness is 0.6 mm – 0.9 mm; consumption per coat is -0.4 litre/m2; coverage per coat is -2.5 m2/litre.

Drains & PenetrationsUse a suitable paintable Tile and Stone Sealant and foam backer rod to seal space between drain or penetration and finish. Do not use a grout or joint filler mortar.

Control JointsCeramic tile, stone and brick installations must include sealant-filled joints over any control joints in the substrate. However, the sealant-filled joints can be offset horizontally by as much as one tile width from the substrate control joint location to coincide with the grout joint pattern.

Movement JointsCeramic tile, stone and brick installations must include provision for expansion at coves, corners, other changes in substrate plane and over any expansion joints in the substrate. Expansion joints in ceramic tile, stone or brickwork are also required at perimeters, at restraining surfaces, at penetrations and at the intervals described in the Australian Standard AS3958.1 Section 5.4.5 & AS 3958.2 Section 4.5 or TCNA detail EJ-171 “Movement Joints – Vertical & Horizontal”. Use compatible Tile and Stone Sealant and backer rod.

Spray applications of HYDRO BANFollow all installation and surface preparation requirements outlined in this document and TDS1003 and TDS1004.

The sprayer being used for the application of HYDRO BAN should be capable of producing a maximum of 22.8 MPa with a flow rate of 3.6 to 6 LPM using a 0.521 or a 0.631 reversible tip. Keep the unit filled with HYDRO BAN to ensure continuous application of liquid. The hose length should not exceed 30 m in length and 9 mm in diameter.

Apply a continuous HYDRO BAN film with an overlapping spray^^. The wet film has a sage green appearance and dries to a darker olive green colour. When the first coat has dried to a uniform olive green colour, approximately 45 to 90 minutes at 21°C, visually inspect the coating for any voids or pinholes. Fill any defects with additional material and apply the second coat^^ at right angles to the first. The wet film thickness should be checked periodically using a wet film gauge. Each wet coat should be 0.4 mm – 0.6 mm thick. The combined dried coating should be 0.6 mm – 0.9 mm thick.

Check application thickness with a wet film gauge periodically as the HYDRO BAN is being dispensed to ensure that the appropriate thickness and coverage is achieved. Bounce back and overspray will consume more product. To achieve the required film thickness, the coating must be free from pinholes and air bubbles. Do not back roll the spray applied coating. All the HYDRO BAN® to cure in accordance with the instructions in this document, TDS1003 and TDS1004 prior to the installation of the tile or stone finish.

It is important to note that areas not scheduled to receive the HYDRO BAN should be masked off and protected from any potential overspray. Observe treatments outlined in this document, TDS1003 and TDS1004 for movement joints.

CleaningWhile wet, HYDRO BAN can be washed from tools with water.

6. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information:

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

For online distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

DS-1036-1015

Page 161: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2015 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.

DS-1036-1015

7. MAINTENANCELATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH soap and water. All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on properly maintaining products supplied by other manufacturers.

8. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

9. DISCLAIMER § The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the best

of our knowledge is true and accurate.

§ This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

§ The use of this product is beyond our control and LATICRETE is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from the incorrect use of this product.

§ Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, LATAPOXY SP-100, SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout and SPECTRALOCK 2000IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

Page 162: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

SPECTRALOCK® 2000 IG

1. PRODUCT NAME

SPECTRALOCK® 2000 IGUnited States Invention Patent No.:6881768 (and other Patents)

2. MANUFACTURER

LATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG is a highly chemical resistant industrial grade epoxy grout for: ceramic tile, pavers, floor brick, packing house tile, and stone. SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG is supplied as factory proportioned kits consisting of epoxy resin, hardener, and chemical resistant silica filler.

UsesUse in corrosive environments such as:

Industrial – bakeries, dairies, cheese factories, breweries, CIP rooms, meat packing plants, soft drink plants, confectioneries, canneries, distilleries, pharmaceutical factories, veterinary hospitals, clinics and kennels.

Commercial – institutional kitchens, fast food restaurants, cafeterias, laboratories, supermarkets.

Advantages n High chemical resistance

n Improved temperature resistance

n Maximum physical strength

n Inhibits the growth of stain causing mould and mildew in the grout joints with Microban® antimicrobial product protection

n Highly resistant to bacteria attack

n Water cleanable

n Grout may remain in pail while grouting

n Fast curing

n Cures at low temperatures

Packaging#4 Resin (Commercial Unit): carton; 56 cartons per pallet

Part A: 4 x 0.5 kg

Part B: 4 x 1 kg

Shelf LifeFactory sealed containers of this product are guaranteed to be of first quality for two (2) years.

Limitations n Maximum chemical resistance is achieved in seven (7)

days at 21°C. Protect from exposure to strong chemicals until fully cured; at colder temperatures it takes longer to achieve full cure.

n Grouts for ceramic tile, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproofing membranes. When a waterproofing membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproofing Membrane.

n Please consult with LATICRETE Technical Services for specific recommendations, if grout will be exposed to chemicals other than those indicated on the chemical resistant chart.

n Not for use with colour #44 Bright White.

CautionsConsult MSDS for more safety information.

n Protect finished work from chemical exposure, dirt and traffic until fully cured.

n Until cured, SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG liquid components might irritate eyes and skin. Avoid contact with eyes and or prolonged contact with skin. In case of contact, flush thoroughly with water.

n DO NOT take internally. Silica sand may cause cancer or serious lung problems. Avoid breathing dust. Wear a respirator in dusty areas. See MSDS for more information.

n Keep out of reach of children.

4. TECHNICAL DATA

Meets and exceeds the requirements of AS ISO13007.1 as an R2 Grout.

Registration #143530

NSF Registration assures inspection officials and end users that formulation and labels meet appropriate food safety regulation. NSF International launched its voluntary Non-food

Compounds Registration Program in 1999 to re-introduce the previous authorisation program administered by the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA).

DS-1069-0813

Page 163: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

Evaluation per ANSI A118.3

Property Value

Test/No. Evaluation Requirement

Water Cleanability (E5.1)

Pass 80 minutes

Initial Setting Time (E5.2)

Pass 2 hours

Service Setting Time (E5.2)

Pass 7 days

Shrinkage (E5.3)

0.07% 0.25%

Sag (E5.4)

Pass No change

Quarry Shear Bonds (E5.5)

15.2 MPa* 6.9 MPa

Compressive Strength (E5.6)

57.2 MPa 24 MPa

Tensile Strength (E5.7)

20.7 MPa 6.9 MPa

Thermal Shock (E5.8)

14.5 MPa 3.4 MPa

* Tile failed during test TCA-061-93

Evaluation per ANSI A118.5

Property Test Method EvaluationGrout Requirement

Silica

Compressive Strength

ASTM C579 57.2 MPa 21 MPa

Tensile Strength ASTM C307 20.7 MPa 2.75 MPa

Absorption ASTM C413 0.19% Max. 1%

Modulus of Rupture

ASTM C580 37 MPa 4.1 MPa

Initial Set, Hours ASTM C308 2 Max 5

Final Set, Days ASTM C308 6 Max 7

Linear Shrinkage ASTM C531 0.06% Max. 1%

Working Time Minutes

ASTM C308 80 Min. 10

Bond Strength ASTM C321 Pass* 1 MPa

* Brick failed during test

Service Temperature Range**

Intermittent Exposure Up to 182°C

Constant Exposure Up to 80°C

** Service Temperature Exposure defined as: Intermittent – where hot materials, liquids or steam come in contact with grout for a short

time Constant – where grout is subjected to continuous heat such as under a bakery oven

Working Properties at 21°C

Working Time 80 minutes

Wet Density 1500 kg/m3

Time to Traffic

Floor Temperature

Cure Time

Time to Light Traffic*

Time to Heavy Traffic**

Full Cure***

4°C 24 hours 48 hours 7 days

10°C 20 hours 32 hours 7 days

16°C 16 hours 24 hours 7 days

21°C 5 hours 10 hours 5 days

27°C 4 hours 7 hours 1 day

32°C 2 hours 3 hours 12 hours

* Foot traffic ** Place equipment *** Exposure to chemical and heat

Chemical Resistance* Chart

Chemical NameContinuous Exposure

Intermittent Exposure

Splash Expo-sure

Food Acids

Lactic to 10% R R R

Acetic to 10% R R R

Formic to 5% R R R

Citric to 50% R R R

Tartaric to 50% R R R

Tannic to 50% R R R

Oleic to 100% R R R

Phosphoric to 80% R R R

Mineral Acids

Hydroflouric acid** 10%

R R R

Sulfuric to 50%** R R R

Nitric to 30%** R R R

Hydrochloric to** 36.5%

R R R

Corrosive Cleaners

Sodium Hypochlo-rite** (Bleach) 3%

R R R

Sodium Hydroxide (Saturated)

R R R

Solvents

Xylene R R R

Ethyl Alcohol R R R

Mineral Spirits R R R

Toluene R R R

Methylene Chloride NR NR NR

Gasoline R R R

* Chemical Resistance defined as: Splash – minor spill wiped up quickly such as in a laboratory Intermittent – exposure to chemicals where clean up takes place several times a day such

as in a commercial kitchen Continuous – heavy exposure to chemicals where clean up is less frequent such as in an

industrial food plant R=Recommended, NR=Not Recommended Chemical Resistance determined in accordance with ASTM C267. ** Long exposure will cause colour changeSpecifications subject to change without notification. Results shown are typical but reflect test procedures used. Actual field performance will depend on installation methods and site conditions.

5. INSTALLATION

Refer to SPECTRALOCK® 2000 IG How to Install Guide for more information.

Surface PreparationBefore starting to grout remove spacers and debris in grout joints and remove dust and dirt using a damp sponge. Allow to dry. Do not leave water standing in joints. Do not clean tiles with acid cleaners.

Substrate temperature must be between 7°C and 32°C.

Note: Temperature will affect working properties of SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG. Warm temperatures will speed curing and shorten working time. Cool temperatures will slow curing and require longer time to traffic. Store SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG (including Part C) at 21°C for 24 hours prior to use.

MixingPour SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG Part A and Part B into a clean mixing pail and mix thoroughly with a drill mixer until liquids are completely blended. Add all of the Part C powder. The mix will look thick at the beginning. Whip it thoroughly with high speed mixer (450 RPM) until uniformly blended (minimum 2 minutes) This will aerate the grout to very fluffy mix.

DS-1069-0813

Page 164: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

ApplicationFor maximum pot life, remove grout from bucket and spread on floor or plastic sheeting. Spread the grout with sharp, firm rubber grout float. Work the grout paste into the joints. Insure the joint is filled and grout is not sitting on top. Remove excess grout from the face of the tiles with the edge of the grout float. Hold the float at 90° angle and pull it diagonally across the joints and tile to avoid pulling out the material.

Cleaning

Initial CleaningUSE INITIAL WASH CLEANING ADDITIVE!

Once grout has been spread, wait approximately 15 minutes at 21°C prior to beginning initial wash. Add Initial Wash cleaning additive to 7.5 litres of clean water and mix until fully dissolved.

Do not mix cleaning additive with grout. Wipe grout joints and tile surface with a white nylon pad and plenty of water (with the cleaning additive) using a circular motion. Drag a damp clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surface to remove grout residue.

Final CleaningUSE FINAL WASH CLEANING ADDITIVE!

Wait at least 90 minutes at 21°C for the final wash using the same procedure as in the initial wash. Prepare another two 7.5 litres of clean water and add the Final Wash cleaning additive and mix until fully dissolved. In the final wash avoid contact with the grout – clean the tile surface only.

6. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE® and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information: Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

For online Distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

7. MAINTENANCE

LATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH soap and water. All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on proper maintenance products supplied by other manufacturers. See TDS1005 for further information.

8. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

9. DISCLAIMER

n The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the best of our knowledge is true and accurate.

n This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

n The use of this product is beyond our control and LATICRETE is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from the incorrect use of this product.

n Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout and SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2013 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.

DS-1069-0813

Page 165: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

Latasil™

1. PRODUCT NAME

LATICRETE® Latasil™

2. MANUFACTURER

LATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

LATICRETE Latasil sealant is a high performance, one component, neutral cure, 100% silicone sealant designed for ceramic tile and stone applications.

Uses n Exterior and interior use.

n Swimming pools and other wet area applications.

n Joints for ceramic tile & stone applications.

n Expansion joints in residential and commercial applications.

Advantages n Conforms to the following properties under ASTM C–920:

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, Use I, Use M, Use G.

n Conforms to ASTM C-794 Adhesion Properties.

n Equipped with fungicides to resist mould and mildew growth.

n Resistant to pool chemicals.

n Easy to smooth and tool.

n Excellent for masonry construction.

n Excellent movement capacity — 25% extension and compression.

n Can be used where ceramic tile abuts glass and window framing.

n Compliments LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive system.

Suitable Substrates n Stone

n Glass

n Metal/steel

n Ceramic tile

n Masonry surfaces

n Wood and plastic surfaces

Available ColoursContact LATICRETE for available colours.

Packaging305 ml cartridge; 6 cartridges per carton; 240 cartons per pallet

Accessory ProductsLATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer 0.47 litre jar; 5 per carton

Approximate Coverage Per TubeCoverage will vary depending upon joint size and width.

3.35 m at 9 mm x 9 mm joint width

7.62 m at 6 mm x 6 mm joint width

Shelf LifeWhen stored in the original, unopened containers at or below 32°C, LATICRETE Latasil sealant has a 12 month shelf life.

Limitations n Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic

tile, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproofing membranes. When a waterproofing membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproofing Membrane.

n A test area should be conducted when used with stone. Test sealant on small area to verify results.

n Use LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer for porous stone and tile and for wet area applications. Conduct a test area to verify results.

n Not for use in applications where physical abuse or abrasion is likely.

n Do not use on or adjacent to building materials that may bleed oils, plasticisers or solvent materials such as impregnated wood, oil based caulks, green or partially vulcanised rubber gaskets or tapes.

n For stone installations, test a small area to check for any fluid migration and to verify results.

n Not a structural glazing adhesive.

n Joint depth should not exceed 12 mm thickness (use backer rod for deeper joints).

n Joint width should not exceed 25 mm and be narrower than 3 mm.

n For perimeter sealing or expansion joint design, the ratio of the joint width to sealant depth should be roughly 2:1.

n Cannot be painted.

DS-1074-0612

Page 166: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

CautionsConsult MSDS for more safety information.

n Protect finished work from traffic and exposure to water until fully cured, generally 24 hours at 21°C.

n Sealant must cure a minimum of 4 days at 21°C and 50% R.H. prior to exposing to continuous water submersion.

n However, the other tile/stone installation materials (e.g. mortars, membranes, grouts) must cure a minimum of 14 days at 21°C and 50% R.H. prior to exposing to continuous water submersion.

n Maintain surface temperature between 4°C and 32°C during installation and for 24 hours thereafter.

n Uncured sealant may irritate eyes if contact is made. Avoid contact with sealant until cured.

n Keep out of reach of children.

n If uncured sealant comes in contact with skin, wash with soap and water immediately.

n Always use LATICRETE® Latasil™ with adequate ventilation and avoid prolonged breathing of vapour and prolonged skin contact.

4. TECHNICAL DATA

Applicable StandardAdhesion performance according to ASTM C–794.

Conforms to ASTM C–920 Sealant classification.

Physical Properties

Service Temperature Range -40°C to +177°C

Sag or Slump None

Tack Free Time at 25°C and 50% R.H. 17 minutes

Tooling Time 7 – 10 minutes

Durometer Hardness – Shore A 27

Tensile Strength 1.9 MPa

Dynamic Joint Movement +/-25%

Weatherability, 10,000 hours QUV Weatherometre

No Change

5. INSTALLATION

PreparationClean all joints and surfaces to receive sealant, removing all foreign matter and contaminants such as grease, oil, dust, water, frost, surface dirt, old sealants and protective coatings.

Metal, glass and plastic surfaces should be cleaned by mechanical or solvent procedures. Simple detergent or soap and water treatments are not acceptable. In all cases where utilised, solvents should be wiped on and off with clean, oil and lint free cloths.

When using any solvent always follow solvent manufacturer’s safety, handling and installation recommendations.

Application

Substrates For PrimingUse LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer for these substrates:

n Stainless steel

n Sandstone*

n Metal

n Limestone (or other porous stones)

n PVC

n Fiber reinforced cement * Subject to testing and approval by LATICRETE. Actual stone samples to be provided for

testing

Swimming Pool Application n Use LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer for all permanent wet

area applications.

n For underwater or continuous wet area applications, polyethylene foam backer rod is recommended. Use polyethylene bond breaker tape on joints too shallow to accommodate foam rod. Polyethylene backer rod is “closed cell” which is water repellent.

General Installation Instructions n Use polyurethane or polyethylene foam backer rod for

deep joints. Use polyethylene bond breaker tape on joints too shallow to accommodate foam rod. These materials allow the silicone to stretch freely with joint movement.

n Apply masking tape to the face of the veneer. Masking tape will allow for easier removal of sealant if it comes into contact with the face of the veneer. Sealant should only be applied into the joints, adhering to the flanks of the veneer. Applying the masking tape results in a cleaner look, and allows for easy tooling without affecting the face of the veneer.

n Apply sealant into the joint, filling completely.

n Finish joints with a “Jointing Tool” when complete (within 5 – 7 minutes) for a smooth professional finish. Proper tooling of the sealant ensures contact with the joint flanks.

n Remove masking tape immediately after tooling. Wipe any sealant off the face of the veneer immediately.

CleaningCured joints should be cleaned regularly with a neutral pH cleaner.

6. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information: Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

For online Distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

7. MAINTENANCE

LATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH soap and water. All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on properly maintaining products supplied by other manufacturers.

8. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

DS-1074-0612

Page 167: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

9. DISCLAIMER

n The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the best of our knowledge is true and accurate.

n This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

n The use of this product is beyond our control and liability is assumed by the user when used incorrectly and not in accordance with LATICRETE guidelines.

n The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from incorrect usage of this product.

n The specifier or other party responsible for the project must ensure that the details in this data sheet are appropriate for the intended application and that additional detailing is performed for specific design or any areas that fall outside the scope of this specification.

n Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, LATICRETE® SpectraLOCK® PRO Grout, LATAPOXY SP-100 and LATICRETE SpectraLOCK 2000 IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2012 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.

DS-1074-0612

Page 168: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

345 Platinum

1. PRODUCT NAME 345 Platinum

2. MANUFACTURER LATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION345 Platinum is the ultimate one-step, polymer fortified, thin-set adhesive for interior and exterior installation of ceramic tile, reduced thickness porcelain, stone, quarry tile, pavers and brick. 345 Platinum, designed to just mix with water, has a long open time with unsurpassed adhesion and workability.

UsesExcellent for exterior and underwater applications as well as providing superior bond to exterior glue plywood (interior only) and concrete. Superior bond to masonry. The ultimate thin-set adhesive for reduced thickness porcelain, ceramic and glass tile.

Advantages § Interior and exterior use

§ High performance flexible cement based adhesive

§ High tack, non sag

§ Extended open time

§ Easy to use – plastic and workable

Suitable Substrates § Concrete

§ Concrete masonry

§ Cement mortar beds

§ Cement plaster

§ Ceramic tile and stones

§ Suitable waterproof membranes

§ Brick masonry

§ Cement terrazzo

§ Gypsum wall board^

§ Cement backer board**

§ Plastic laminate^

§ Properly prepared vinyl tile^

§ Cut-back adhesives^

§ Exterior glue plywood^~

^ Interior use only.** Consult cement backer board manufacturer for specific installation recommendations and to verify acceptability for

exterior use.~ A bond CD Radiata Plywood.

Packaging20 kg bag; 56 bags per pallet

Available ColourOff-White

Approximate Coverage(Based on product wet densities with a trowel at 45°)

§ 7.5 – 8.5 m2 with a 6 mm x 6 mm square notched trowel

§ 4.5 – 5.5 m2 with a 10 mm x 10 mm square notched trowelCoverage will depend on how the trowel is used and surface regularity.

Shelf LifeFactory sealed containers of this product are guaranteed to be of first quality for one (1) year* if stored off the ground in a dry area.

* High humidity will reduce the shelf life of bagged product.

Limitations § Not for direct use over hardwood or strip wood flooring, particle board, Luan or

Masonite®.

§ Not for use over expansion joints or structural movement cracks.

§ Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproof membranes. When a waterproof membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproof Membrane.

§ Note: Surfaces must be structurally sound, stable and rigid enough to support ceramic/stone tile, thin brick and similar finishes. Substrate deflection under all live, dead and impact loads, including concentrated loads, must not exceed L/360 for thin bed ceramic tile/brick installations or L/480 for thin bed stone installations where L = span length.

Cautions § During cold weather, protect finished work from traffic until fully cured.

§ Use white adhesive for installing white or light coloured marble or stone.

§ Use LATAPOXY 300® Adhesive for resin backed tile or stone, installing green marble or water sensitive stone, agglomerates or tile.

§ Wait 14 days @ 21°C after final grouting before filling water features and pools.

§ Keep out of reach of children.

§ Contains Portland cement and silica sand. May irritate eyes and skin. Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged contact with skin. In case of contact, flush

DS-1166-0815

Page 169: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

thoroughly with water. Use rubber gloves and eye protection when handling product.

§ Do not take internally. Silica sand may cause cancer or serious lung problems. Avoid breathing dust. Wear an approved respirator in dusty areas.

§ Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement. Contact Laticrete for information on reducing the effects of efflorescence.

4. TECHNICAL DATA

Performance PropertiesWhen tested in accordance with AS ISO13007.1 & 2 is classified as a C2TES2P2Note: Tested with 18 mm CD A bond Radiata Plywood.

TEST METHOD RESULT

28 day Tensile strength >2MPa

Water immersion >1MPa

Heat Ageing >2MPa

Transverse deformation >5 mm

Working Properties at 21°C

PROPERTY VALUE

Open Time ≥30 minutes

Pot Life 3 hours

Time to Heavy Traffic 24 hours

Wet Density 1600 kg/m3

Specifications subject to change without notification. Results shown are typical but reflect test procedures used. Actual field performance will depend on installation methods and site conditions.

5. INSTALLATIONUnless otherwise stated in this document, LATICRETE technical data sheets and guidelines, all work should be in accordance with AS3958.1 -2007.

Surface PreparationAll surfaces should be between 4°C and 32°C and structurally sound, clean and free of all laitance, dirt, oil, grease, loose peeling paint, concrete sealers or curing compounds. Rough or uneven concrete surfaces should be made smooth with a LATICRETE Latex Portland Cement underlayment to provide a floated finish, CSP1 to CSP3. Dry, dusty concrete slabs or masonry should be dampened and excess water swept off. Installation may be made on a damp surface. 345 Platinum does not require a minimum cure time for concrete slabs however additional movement joints should be considered for more than normal shrinkage and creep. All slabs must be plumb and true to within 5 mm in 3 m and 1.5 mm in 600 mm from the high spot, unless tighter tolerances are required by the format of the tile. Concrete Surface Profile should be between the ranges of CSP1 to CSP 3. Expansion joints shall be provided through the tile work, over all construction or expansion joints in the substrate. Follow Australian Standards requirements for Expansion Joints in AS3958.1 and 2. Do not cover expansion joints with adhesive.

CSP1 to CSP3

MixingPlace potable water into a clean pail and add 345 powder. Mix by hand or with

a slow speed mixer to a smooth, trowelable consistency. Use approximately 4.8 - 5.2 litres of water per 20 kg bag for normal consistency thin-set. Allow adhesive to slake for 5-10 minutes. Remix without adding any more water or powder. During use, stir occasionally to keep mix fluffy. Do not temper with water.

Note: For a slurry bond coat; mix 5.8 – 6 litres of water to a 20 kg bag of 345 Platinum. Refer to TDS1009 for more information.

For reduced thickness porcelain adhesive; mix 5.2 -5.6 litres to a 20 kg bag of 345 Platinum – ensure notched ridges still stand.

ApplicationApply the adhesive to the substrate with the flat side of the trowel, pressing firmly to work into surface. Comb on additional adhesive with the notched side. Note: Use the proper sized notched trowel to insure full bedding of the tile. Spread as much adhesive as can be covered with tile in 10-15 minutes or whilst adhesive is wet and tacky. Back butter large tiles > 200 mm x 200 mm to provide full bedding and firm support if required. Place tiles into wet, sticky adhesive and beat in using a beating block and rubber mallet to imbed tile and adjust level. Check adhesive for complete coverage by periodically removing a tile and inspecting bedding adhesive transfer onto back of tile. If the adhesive is skinned over (not sticky), remove and replace with fresh adhesive.

GroutingGrout after adhesive and bedding is dry - typically 24 hours curing @ 21°C using PERMACOLOR® Select†, PERMACOLOR Grout, or Sanded and Smooth Grout mixed with LATICRETE 1776 Grout Enhancer. For maximum stain resistance use SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout.

Tile on Tile workExisting ceramic tile must be firmly bonded to rigid floor construction. Tiled surfaces to receive tile must be prepared; shiny and highly glossed glazes should be removed by scarification; always cleaned to remove grease, wax, oil or any other contamination that will inhibit bond; clean with alkaline solutions like Tri-sodium Phosphate (TSP) or electric dishwasher powder and hot water after surface preparation (follow cleaning agent manufacturers safe use instructions) as required and rinsed with clean water and allowed to dry after cleaning.

Apply a continuous skim coat, nominally 1.5 mm thick, of adhesive and vigorously work into the surface before combing additional adhesive over the skim coat using the appropriate sized trowel to suit the bedding requirements of the tile or panel.

Cold Weather NoteThe setting of Portland cement adhesives, mortars and grouts are retarded by low temperatures. Protect finished work for an extended period when installing in cold weather. For faster setting adhesives use LATICRETE Rapid Setting Thin-Set Adhesives and Additives. Do not set tile when surface temperature is below freezing or when substrate is frozen.

Hot Weather NoteThe evaporation of moisture in Portland cement adhesives, mortars and grouts is accelerated by hot, dry conditions. Apply to dampened surfaces and protect freshly spread mortar and finished work when installing in temperatures over 35°C.

CleaningClean tools and tile work with water while adhesive is fresh.

6. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information:

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

DS-1166-0815

Page 170: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

For online distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

7. MAINTENANCELATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH detergent and water. All stone and tiles should be maintained and sealed with STONETECH® products as appropriate for the specific tile / stone and installation situation.

All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on properly maintaining products supplied by other manufacturers.

8. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

9. DISCLAIMER § The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the

best of our knowledge is true and accurate.

§ This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

§ The use of this product is beyond our control and liability is assumed by the user when used incorrectly and not in accordance with LATICRETE guidelines.

§ The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from incorrect usage of this product.

§ The specifier or other party responsible for the project must ensure that the details in this data sheet are appropriate for the intended application and that additional detailing is performed for specific design or any areas that fall outside the scope of this specification.

§ Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, LATAPOXY SP-100, SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout and SPECTRALOCK 2000IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2015 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.

DS-1166-0815

†United States Invention Patent No.: 6,784,229 (and other Patents).

Page 171: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

LATASIL™ 9118 Primer

1. PRODUCT NAME LATASIL™ 9118 Primer

2. MANUFACTURER LATICRETE Pty Ltd. 29 Telford Street Virginia, QLD 4014 Australia

Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Fax: 07 3865 2250 Internet: www.laticrete.com.au

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONLATASIL 9118 Primer is a one component primer designed to increase adhesion of LATASIL to various substrates.

Uses § Increases adhesion and bond strength for dependable long lasting installations.

§ For all underwater and permanent wet area applications such as pools, fountains, showers, tubs, spas, saunas and steam rooms.

§ Ideal for stone applications.

§ Ideal for harsh environment.

Advantages § Ready to use

§ Fast dry time

§ Durable bond is unaffected by water

Suitable Substrates § PVC

§ Stone

§ Ceramic/masonry

§ Metals/steel

§ Porcelain

Packaging240 ml bottle; 5 bottles per carton.

Shelf LifeWhen stored in original, unopened containers at or below 32°C, shelf life is 6 months from date of manufacture. Container should be kept tightly sealed when not in use.

Limitations § Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, pavers, brick and stone

are not replacements for waterproofing membranes. When a waterproofing membrane is required, use a LATICRETE Waterproofing Membrane

§ Flammable—cannot be shipped air freight.

CautionsBefore using any LATICRETE product:

§ Read and understand the Product Data Sheet and Material Safety Data Sheet.

§ Avoid direct contact with eyes. If contact with eyes occurs, immediately flush with water and seek medical attention.

§ Avoid prolonged exposure to skin. In case of skin contact, wash affected area as soon as possible.

§ Keep away from heat, sparks and open flames.

§ Use with adequate ventilation, avoid prolonged breathing of vapours.

§ Flammable—store in safe location.

§ Test a small area when applying to stone for compatibility.

§ Keep out of reach of children.

4. INSTALLATION

Surface Preparation § Thoroughly clean all surfaces of dust, dirt tar, oils, and other debris. Remove rust

and scale from metal surfaces by abrasive cleaning or wire brushing. Masonry surfaces should also be wire brushed and blown with compressed air to remove dust.

§ Thoroughly clean and degrease all surfaces with an industrial solvent such as naptha, mineral spirits, xylene, toluene or MEK on a clean oil-free rag.

Application § Sealant must be installed in the manner indicated for intended performance.

§ Consult LATICRETE Technical Services for specific sealant installation applications.

§ Apply LATASIL 9118 Primer to clean, dry surfaces by brushing, dipping, or spraying.

§ Apply a thin layer evenly to the substrate-do not apply too thick as bond will break.

§ Take care not to contaminate the veneer surface.

§ Allow the primer to dry until all the solvent evaporates and is dry to the touch (generally 30 – 60 minutes at 21°C. Drying time depends on temperature, humidity conditions and the porosity of the substrate.

§ Apply sealant as directed, refer to DS-1074 for more information.

5. AVAILABILITY AND COST

AvailabilityLATICRETE and LATAPOXY® materials are available worldwide.

For Distributor information:

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599

DS-1185-1015

Page 172: SPECIFICATION - ProjectCorpprojectcorp.com.au/wordpress/projectfiles/Bungarribee... · 2016-02-12 · SPECIFICATION Two Amenities Pavilions Type A: Type B: Includes a Rangers Station

Data Sheets are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website at www.laticrete.com.au

For online distributor information, visit LATICRETE at www.laticrete.com.au

CostContact a LATICRETE Distributor in your area.

6. MAINTENANCELATICRETE and LATAPOXY grouts require routine cleaning with a neutral pH detergent and water. All stone and tiles should be maintained and sealed with STONETECH® products as appropriate for the specific tile / stone and installation situation.

All other LATICRETE and LATAPOXY materials require no maintenance but installation performance and durability may depend on properly maintaining products supplied by other manufacturers.

7. TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical assistanceInformation is available by calling

Toll Free: 1800 331 012 Telephone: 07 3865 1599 Fax: 07 3865 2250

Technical and safety literatureTo acquire technical and safety literature, please visit our website at www.laticrete.com.au

8. DISCLAIMER § The information contained in this document is given in good faith and to the

best of our knowledge is true and accurate.

§ This information is subject to change without notice and it is the responsibility of the user to obtain up to date and current information.

§ The use of this product is beyond our control and liability is assumed by the user when used incorrectly and not in accordance with LATICRETE guidelines.

§ The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss or damage arising from incorrect usage of this product.

§ The specifier or other party responsible for the project must ensure that the details in this data sheet are appropriate for the intended application and that additional detailing is performed for specific design or any areas that fall outside the scope of this specification.

§ Efflorescence is a normal condition of Portland cement and is not covered by any warranty. The use of LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive, LATAPOXY SP-100, SPECTRALOCK® PRO Grout and SPECTRALOCK 2000IG will not contribute to any noticeable efflorescence.

DS-1185-1015

LATICRETE Pty Ltd29 Telford StreetVirginia, QLD 4014Australia1800 331 012

www.laticrete.com.au

©2015 LATICRETE Pty LtdAll trademarks shown are the intellectual properties of their respective owners.